JP6683331B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value according to a symbol combination when the variable display row is stopped.

  As an example of a gaming machine, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are provided, and when the start switch is operated, the winning combination lottery is performed and the rotation of the reel is started, and the result of the winning combination lottery and the operation mode of the stop switch ( There is a slot machine that can stop the rotation of the reels based on the pushing order, the operation timing, etc.) and can provide the privilege according to the combination of the symbols on the pay line when all the reels are stopped. Further, as an advantageous state for the player, a bonus for improving the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination (for example, a small winning combination or replay), RT (Replay Time), and the result of the winning combination lottery result in winning a plurality of winning combinations. There is also a slot machine provided with an AT (Assist Time) for notifying operation information that is advantageous to the player for winning a larger winning combination when a player wins. In addition, such as a pachinko game machine that shoots a pachinko ball to the game area and displays a combination of symbols by displaying a plurality of types of symbols variably by winning at the starting winning opening provided in the game area. Are known.

  In such a gaming machine, in order to improve the effect on the liquid crystal display or the like, after the player is prompted to operate the effect button, a corresponding effect is executed according to the operation on the effect button. There was a thing (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP 2012-165936 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, after the reel is rotated, the first stop operation is performed to trigger the production of the production buttons. In this way, after the first stop operation, an operation to the effect button different from the stop operation is urged, which may interrupt the flow of the game. Specifically, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to perform the second stop operation with good rhythm following the first stop operation due to the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of prompting a production operation at a suitable timing.

A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, a variable display in each of the variable display columns. In the gaming machine capable of starting, and imparting a gaming value according to the symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, gaming operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations, and the gaming operation Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, production operation detection means for detecting the production operation, and production operation to the production operation detection means. And a production control unit that controls execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the user, and the plurality of types of game operations start variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows. And a final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display row in a state where only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. The means can start the promotion effect in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. The promotion effect started in at least one of the period and the second period can be continuously executed until the operation for the effect is detected even after the period ends, The control means is capable of specifying whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by detecting the effect operation along with the promotion effect. The operation-corresponding effect execution unit includes an operation-corresponding effect executing unit that executes any one of a plurality of kinds of effects including an unidentifiable effect that cannot determine whether or not a privilege is given, and the operation-accepting effect executing unit determines the specification. The ratio at which the possible effect is executed is set to be higher in the second period than in the first period, and the operation-specific effect execution unit causes the unidentifiable effect to occur. The ratio to be executed is set to be higher in the first period than in the second period, and the effect control means sets the promotion effect in a predetermined mode and a special mode. Is executed in any of a plurality of modes, and the ratio at which the operation-specific effect execution unit executes the identifiable effect in the second period is promotion in the special mode when the privilege is not given. Performance It is higher when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed than when the output is executed, and when the privilege is granted, the special effect is higher than when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed. It is set to be higher when the promotion effect in the aspect is executed .

  According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. Further, the unidentifiable effect is easily executed in the first period, and the unidentifiable effect is easily executed in the second period after the first period in the game flow. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the privilege has been granted in the first period, and to easily maintain the sense of expectation that the privilege has been imparted until the second period, thus improving the enjoyment of the game. it can. Further, since the identifiable effect is easily executed in the second period, it is easy to identify whether or not the privilege is given, and it is possible to give a sharp distinction as to whether or not the privilege is given. it can. Moreover, after the promotion effect is once started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to panic.

  A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, a variable display in each of the variable display columns. In the gaming machine capable of starting, and imparting a gaming value according to the symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, gaming operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations, and the gaming operation Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, production operation detection means for detecting the production operation, and production operation to the production operation detection means. And a production control unit that controls execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the user, and the plurality of types of game operations start variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows. And a final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display row in a state where only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. The means can start the promotion effect in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. The promotion effect started in at least one of the period and the second period can be continuously executed until the effect operation is detected even after the period ends, and the promotion is performed. The effect is a first pattern for executing an unidentifiable effect in which it is impossible to specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by detecting the effect operation. A second pattern for executing a identifiable effect capable of specifying whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the detection of the effect operation, and the promotion effect by the first pattern is the first effect. The ratio started in one period is set to be higher than the ratio in which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period.

  According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. Further, the rate at which the promotion effect according to the first pattern is started in the first period is higher than the rate at which the promotion effect according to the second pattern is started in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities to increase the sense of expectation by starting the promotion effect according to the first pattern in the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, after the promotion effect is once started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to panic.

A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, a variable display in each of the variable display columns. In the gaming machine capable of starting, and imparting a gaming value according to the symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, gaming operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations, and the gaming operation Game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, production operation detection means for detecting the production operation, and production operation to the production operation detection means. And a production control unit that controls execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the user, and the plurality of types of game operations start variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows. And a final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display row in a state where only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. The means can start the promotion effect in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. The promotion effect started in at least one of the period and the second period can be continuously executed until the operation for the effect is detected even after the period ends, The control means executes the promotion effect in any of a plurality of types of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and the promotion effect in the special mode is the second period. Mushrooms start at a higher rate than in the first period, and the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is higher in the first period than in the second period. Start , the effect control means is a identifiable effect that can specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the detection of the effect operation associated with the promotion effect, and the privilege. In the second period, the operation-corresponding effect executing means includes an operation-corresponding effect executing means for executing one of a plurality of kinds of effects including an unspecifiable effect that cannot be specified whether or not to be given. The rate at which the identifiable effect is executed is higher when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed than when the promotion effect in the special mode is executed when the privilege is not given, The award is granted In such a case, it is determined that the time when the promotion effect in the special mode is executed is higher than the time when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed .

  According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. Further, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the special mode in the second period, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, after the promotion effect is once started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to panic.

  Preferably, an image display unit capable of displaying a plurality of layers in which images can be displayed in a display area in an overlapping manner is provided, and the effect control means executes a background effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and the promotion effect and the The background effect is an effect executed by displaying corresponding images on the image display unit, and the image corresponding to the promotion effect has a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background effect. Displayed in higher layers.

  With this configuration, the image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed with priority over the image corresponding to the background effect. As a result, the image corresponding to the background effect in which the image corresponding to the promotion effect is embedded is unnecessary without increasing the processing load, and the image corresponding to the promotion effect can be appropriately and reliably displayed.

  Preferably, the effect control means executes the promotion effect in any of a plurality of types of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and when a privilege advantageous to a player is granted, than when the privilege is not granted. The promotion effect is executed in the special mode at a high rate.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation that the promotion effect is executed in the special mode, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Preferably, an image display unit capable of displaying a plurality of layers capable of displaying images in a display area by superimposing them is provided, and the effect control means displays an image corresponding to the promotion effect on the image display unit. In order to execute the promotion effect, in a standby state in which an operation has not been detected for a predetermined time, the display area is smaller than that in the standby state, and the display area is closer to the edge of the display area. By displaying an image corresponding to the promotion effect and detecting the effect operation along with the promotion effect in the standby state, a menu effect that allows a game history to be displayed in the display area is executed.

  According to this configuration, in the standby state, an image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed in a display area that is smaller and closer to the edge than in the non-standby state, and the menu effect is executed by detecting the effect operation. Therefore, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect from being executed in such a manner as to give an excessive feeling of expectation.

  Preferably, the effect operation detected during the promotion effect is effectively accepted.

  Preferably, the effect control means is a first mode in which power consumption of a plurality of types of effect means used for execution of the plurality of types of effects is not suppressed and a second mode in which power consumption of the plurality of kinds of effect means is suppressed. Controlling to any one of a plurality of modes including and, the effect operation detecting means detects an operation on a predetermined operation part as the effect operation, and the plurality of types of effect means correspond to the predetermined operation part. The light production means for irradiating light is provided, and during the promotion production, the light production is performed with the same power consumption regardless of which of the plurality of modes is controlled. Control means.

  According to this configuration, the light effecting means is controlled with the same power consumption during the promotion effect regardless of which of the plurality of modes is controlled. For this reason, regardless of the mode being controlled, it is possible to prevent inconveniences from occurring, such as making it difficult for the player to notice that the promotion effect is being executed and making it difficult to understand the target for performing the effect operation. it can.

It is a front view of the slot machine. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door opened. FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure for explaining game control processing. It is a figure for explaining a combination name, a symbol combination, and the like. It is a figure for explaining a winning combination group, a winning combination, and the like. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of each of the gaming state and the advantageous period. It is a figure for explaining an example of processing during AT which is performed during AT among advantageous period setting processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the addition lottery table. It is a figure for explaining an example of total number counter processing. It is a figure for explaining an example of end judgment processing. It is a diagram for explaining the timing when the chance button effect can be started. It is a figure for explaining a display example of a liquid crystal display when a chance button effect is executed. It is a figure for explaining a table referred to when a pattern of chance button effects is drawn. It is a figure for explaining a display example in a liquid crystal display when continuous production of a pattern including a chance button production is executed. It is a figure for explaining a display example in a liquid crystal display when continuous production of a pattern including a chance button production is executed. It is a flow chart for explaining the net additional number display processing executed when the number of bets is set and one game is started. It is a flow chart for explaining a net additional number display process executed when a medal is awarded. It is a figure for explaining a display mode of an OVER display number, and a display mode of a predetermined effect such as a net additional number display. It is a flow chart for explaining a net additional number display processing during RBB. It is a flow chart for explaining end screen processing for displaying an end screen at the end of AT or bonus. It is a figure for explaining an example of various data update processing. It is a figure for explaining an example of increase / decrease of a cumulative number counter and a net increase in the advantageous period. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a display example when AT ends after the ART starts and before the number of net increase reaches “2000”. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the net additional number reaches “2000” during AT after the ART is started. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the net increase in number reaches “2000” during the bonus controlled by winning the RBB in AT after the ART is started. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the net increase in number reaches “2000” while the RBB confirmation screen is displayed in AT after the ART is started. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net additional number is displayed in the normal mode after ART is started. The example of a display when the total number reaches "2370", and the example of an end screen are displayed when the number of net additions is displayed in a rainbow mode after ART is started. It is a figure for demonstrating the portable interlocking setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display in a player menu state, and the screen displayed on the display part of a communication terminal owned by a player. It is a figure for demonstrating the priority etc. of the area | region used for a display among the display areas of a liquid crystal display, and each of a caution display and another image display. It is a timing chart for explaining an example of an effect regarding a caution display. It is a timing chart for explaining an example of an effect regarding a caution display. It is a figure for explaining the display contents of the example of production on a liquid crystal display. It is the figure in order to explain one example of the addition control production control processing in order to control the production in AT among production control processing. 7 is a timing chart for explaining an example when an upper limit is not confirmed and when an upper limit is confirmed. It is a figure for explaining a display example when the background screen in AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. It is a figure for demonstrating the display timing of each of an administrator menu screen and a player menu screen, an end timing, and the control content at the time of the error occurrence during menu display. It is a figure for explaining a transition of a player menu screen in a player menu state. It is a figure for explaining a display example of a production customization screen. It is a flow chart for explaining power-on processing. It is a flow chart for explaining timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart for explaining error processing. It is a flow chart for explaining setting change processing. It is a flow chart for explaining sub control part processing. It is a flow chart for explaining sub side setting change state processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a sub-side game standby process. It is a flowchart for explaining an error notification process. It is a figure for explaining a display example when the update display of the net additional number is stopped by reaching the upper limit cumulative number. It is a figure for explaining an example of increase / decrease of a cumulative number counter and a net increase in the advantageous period. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a special effect. It is a figure for explaining an example of the effect corresponding to a net additional number. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of an end screen. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the game screen in a mobile interlocking | linkage. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of a display screen.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a slot machine capable of executing a game using medals as a game medium will be described. However, the gaming machine is not limited to such a slot machine, and it is not a gaming machine that can execute a game using a game ball as a game medium or a game medium (value of a tangible object such as a medal) but internally. It may be another gaming machine such as a gaming machine that can execute a game using the given score (value of an intangible object such as information recorded by an electromagnetic method).

<Structure example of slot machine>
The overall configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened.

  The slot machine 1 is composed of a member including a box-shaped housing 3 having an opening on the front surface, and a front door 5 attached to one side of the housing 3 so as to be openable and closable. The front surface of the housing 3 is closed by closing the front door 5 with respect to the housing 3. The front door 5 can be locked / unlocked with respect to the housing 3 by a door key managed by a game hall manager. The door sensor 20 detects whether or not the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a display window 7 is provided in the central portion of the front door 5. From the display window 7, the reels 11L, 11M, and 11R (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as reels 11L to 11R) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged can be visually recognized. When the reels 11L to 11R rotate, the state in which the symbols arranged on each of the reels 11L to 11R are variably displayed can be visually recognized from the display window 7. In this way, the display window 7 and the reels 11L to 11R form the variable display portion 13 that variably displays a plurality of symbols.

  The variable display section 13 includes a plurality of variable display columns 10. Specifically, the variable display portion 13 is a left variable display row 10L composed of a portion of the display window 7 in front of the reel 11L and the reel 11L, and a portion of the display window 7 in front of the reel 11M. And a reel 11M, and a right variable display column 10R including a reel 11R and a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11R. When the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the left variable display row 10L, the middle variable display row 10M, and the right variable display row 10R can stop and display the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower rows. Therefore, nine symbols can be visually recognized from the display window 7.

  In the present embodiment, a so-called lower line configured by the lower stage of the left variable display column 10L, the lower stage of the middle variable display column 10M, and the lower stage of the right variable display column 10R is set as the winning line for the winning determination of the winning combination. There is. The winning line NL is drawn on the display window 7.

  A liquid crystal display 27 is provided above the display window 7 of the front door 5. The liquid crystal display 27 executes an effect by displaying a predetermined image according to the progress of a game (game). Further, above the liquid crystal display 27 of the front door 5, an explanation panel 29 on which a predetermined combination of symbols, the number of payouts, etc. are printed is provided, and further above and to the left and right of the explanation panel 29, respectively. , Lamp portions 33L, 33M, 33R are provided. Each of the lamp units 33L, 33M, 33R includes a light source such as an LED and emits light in accordance with the progress of the game to execute the effect.

  On the left side of the display window 7 of the front door 5, a credit indicator 45, a payout indicator 46, a notification display 60, and an advantageous period notification lamp 80 are arranged. The credit indicator 45 displays a credit, which is the number of medals stored (stored) in the slot machine 1 among medals owned by the player. The maximum number of credits is set to 50.

  The payout display device 46 is a display device that displays the number of medals (game media) to be paid out when a winning of a winning combination occurs and also displays various information such as error information and setting suggestion information. The setting suggestion information is information that makes it possible to specify at least one of the setting values 1 to 6, and indicates the setting value that has been set. The notification display 60 is a display for notifying predetermined information for specifying an operation mode (for example, operation timing, a pressing order, etc., which will be also referred to as an advantageous operation mode hereinafter) and a result of a winning combination lottery which are advantageous to the player. It is a vessel. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 is a display device for notifying that it is an advantageous period (hereinafter referred to as an advantageous period) in which an AT game capable of notifying an advantageous operation mode can be permitted.

  The credit indicator 45, the payout indicator 46, and the notification indicator 60 are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notify information according to the lighting mode of each segment. Further, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is configured by, for example, an LED, and is turned on during the advantageous period and turned off during the normal period which is not the advantageous period.

  Various operation parts are provided below the display window 7 of the front door 5. As the operation unit, a bet switch 15, a maximum bet switch 17, a performance operation unit 81, a start switch 19, a settlement switch 23, stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as stop switches 21L to 21R), and A medal slot 25 is provided.

  The bet switch 15 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of bets for one medal using credits. The maximum bet switch 17 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of medals for the maximum bet number using credits. The maximum bet number is the maximum number of bets that can be set for one game (hereinafter also referred to as one game) (in the present embodiment, "3" except for "in bonus state", "in bonus state" is " Set to 2 ”).

  The effect operation unit 81 is a switch that detects an operation related to effect. The operations related to the performance include operations for executing / developing the performance, operations for selecting the performance mode, characters, etc., and an administrator menu for displaying the player menu state and setting history etc. for displaying the game history etc. It includes operations for shifting to the state.

  The start switch 19 is a switch that detects an operation for rotating each of the reels 11L to 11R to start variable display of symbols. The settlement switch 23 is a switch for detecting an operation for paying out medals corresponding to the number of credits or a set bet number. The stop switches 21L to 21R are switches that detect the operation for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel among the reels 11L to 11R and stopping the variable display of the symbols. The medal insertion slot 25 is an opening for the player to insert medals.

  Various switches including the effect operation unit 81 detect an operation to the operation unit (button unit) corresponding to each switch. The operation unit corresponding to each switch is composed of a transmissive member that transmits light. In addition, a light source such as an LED is mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to various switches, and the light is emitted at an operable timing (timing to effectively accept the operation) according to the progress of the game, etc. To execute.

  A lower panel 35 on which a character or the like is printed is provided below the various operation parts of the front door 5. Further, lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided on the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, respectively. The lower lamp portions 37L and 37R include a light source such as an LED, for example, and produce effects by emitting light according to the progress of the game.

  Further, below the lower panel 35, there are provided a medal payout opening 39 for paying out medals in accordance with occurrence of winning a prize, and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout opening 39. Speakers 31L and 31R are provided on the left and right of the medal payout opening 39 for producing effects by outputting sound effects and sounds according to the progress of the game.

  Next, the internal configuration of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a reel unit 9 for housing reels 11L to 11R side by side is provided in the center of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1. The reel unit 9 is fixed to the rear wall of the housing 3. The reel unit 9 includes reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter also referred to as reel motors 14L to 14R) and position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter, position sensors 55L to 55R). It says).

  The reel motors 14L to 14R are fixed side by side with respect to the frame of the reel unit 9, and the corresponding reels of the reels 11L to 11R are fixed to the rotation shafts thereof. As a result, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate and stop. The reel motors 14L to 14R are configured by stepping motors, for example.

  The position sensors 55L to 55R are sensors for detecting that the protrusions provided on the reels 11L to 11R have passed a predetermined position as the reels rotate. The position sensors 55L to 55R are composed of, for example, photo interrupters. The position sensors 55L to 55R are arranged such that, when the protrusions of the corresponding reels are detected, the symbol at a predetermined position of the reel (for example, the symbol of symbol number 19 in FIG. 3) is located in the middle of the display window 7. Is configured.

  A main control board 63 and a sub control board 73 are installed above the reel unit 9 in a state of being housed in a board case. The board case cannot contact the control board without breaking some members, for example, in order to make it easy to identify the traces when the stored control board is tampered with. It has a structure. The main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are electrically connected by a signal line connecting the boards.

  A hopper unit 43 is provided below the reel unit 9. The hopper unit 43 includes a hopper container 42, a full tank sensor 58 (see FIG. 4), a hopper motor 57 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 54 (see FIG. 4).

  The hopper container 42 is a container for storing the medals received from the medal insertion slot 25. The full tank sensor 58 is a sensor that is provided at a predetermined position of the hopper container 42 and detects that the medals stored in the hopper container 42 have reached a predetermined amount and are in a full tank state.

  The hopper motor 57 is a motor that is driven when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and is driven to discharge a predetermined number of medals stored in the hopper container 42. The hopper motor 57 is composed of, for example, a DC motor (Direct Current Motor). The payout sensor 54 is a sensor that detects the medals discharged from the hopper container 42 by the hopper motor 57 one by one. The medals detected by the payout sensor 54 are paid out from the medal payout opening 39 via the medal chute 47 provided below the back surface of the front door 5.

  On the left side of the hopper unit 43, a power supply unit 49 for supplying electric power to various devices included in the slot machine 1 is arranged. The power supply unit 49 is provided with a power switch 50, a reset switch 52, and a change process start switch 56.

  The power switch 50 is a switch that switches whether to supply power to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 52 is a switch for detecting a setting value switching operation during the setting change process in which the setting value can be changed. The reset switch 52 is also used as a switch for canceling an error when an error occurs. The change process start switch 56 includes a key cylinder for setting change process, and is a switch for detecting an operation for shifting to the setting change process. The switch provided inside the housing 3 including the change process start switch 56 is a switch that can be operated when the front door 5 is open. Therefore, basically, only the manager of the game arcade can operate it.

  The set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for specifying the winning probability of winning a predetermined winning combination in the winning combination lottery. In the role lottery, the probability of winning the winning combination can be made different by using the winning probability according to the set value. That is, when the set values that are set are different, even if the same winning combination, the winning probability of winning in the winning combination lottery may differ. As a result, the number of medals to be paid out while the game is executed a predetermined number of times is different depending on the set value that is set, and as a result, the payout rate can be made different. Therefore, it can be said that the set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and also a value for specifying the payout rate. As the set values, for example, 1 to 6 (four levels of set values 1, 2, 5, and 6 in the present embodiment) having different winning probabilities are provided, and the set value 1 is the lowest payout rate. The set value 6 is the highest payout rate. The set value may be provided in 6 stages of 1 to 6. The setting value can be changed by turning on the power with the setting process start switch 56 being turned on by the setting change key managed by the manager of the game arcade to shift to the setting change process.

  The set value can be sequentially switched (for example, 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 5 ...) by operating the reset switch 52 during the setting change process. During the setting change process, the set value is displayed on the payout indicator 46. In the setting change process, after the operation of the start switch 19 is detected, the change process start switch 56 is turned off to store the set value displayed at that time. As a result, the change of the set value is completed, and in the subsequent games, a combination lottery or the like described later is performed based on the stored set value. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized.

  On the back side of the front door 5, a medal selector 48 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the medal slot 25. The medal selector 48 physically selects whether or not the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is a legal medal, and the regular medal is provided on the first flow path 40 side for storing in the hopper container 42. On the other hand, it has a structure of guiding the non-genuine medal to the second flow path 44 side for discharging to the outside.

  Further, the medal selector 48 includes a switching solenoid 51 (see FIG. 4) and an insertion sensor 53 (see FIG. 4). The switching solenoid 51 is a solenoid for forcibly switching the inserted medals to the second flow path 44 side depending on the game situation (for example, during reel rotation, when the credit upper limit is reached, etc.). The insertion sensor 53 is a sensor that detects, one by one, the medals introduced from the medal insertion slot 25 and guided to the first flow path 40 side. The medals detected by the insertion sensor 53 are stored in the hopper container 42 with the front door 5 closed. On the other hand, the medals guided to the second flow path 44 side are discharged from the medal payout opening 39 via the medal chute 47.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the symbol array of each of the reels 11L to 11R will be described. On each of the reels 11L to 11R, as shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. In FIG. 3, for convenience of explanation, a plurality of types of symbols are shown by character strings such as “R7”, “G7”, “BR”, “C1”, “C2”, “BE”, “RP”, “MD”, “T1”, “T2”. However, actually, the patterns corresponding to these character strings are arranged. For example, "R7" is a red "7" design, "G7" is a green "7" design, "BR" is a "BAR" design, "BE" is a "bell" design, and "RP" is a "RP". The pattern of "Replay" is arranged. The plurality of types of designs are not limited to the designs as long as they can be distinguished from other designs, and may be patterns, symbols, numbers, or any other forms. In addition, since "C1" and "C2" are composed of pictures having similar appearances, they are collectively referred to as "C". Similarly, since "T1" and "T2" are also composed of pictures having similar appearances, they are collectively referred to as "T".

  In FIG. 3, symbol numbers 0 to 19 are shown at the left end thereof in association with the symbol arrangement areas in which the symbols are arranged on the reels 11L to 11R, respectively. The symbol numbers 0 to 19 are numbers for specifying which symbol arrangement area is the symbol in each of the reels 11L to 11R of the present embodiment.

  In the case of the present embodiment, for example, reel tapes on which symbols of symbol numbers 0 to 19 are printed are attached to the peripheral surfaces of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, when the reels 11L to 11R rotate, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in the display window 7 in a predetermined order, such as a symbol number ... 19 → 18 → 17 → ... 2 → 1 → 0 → 19 → 18. Can be made.

  In the slot machine 1 having the above-described configuration, first, a specified number (in the present embodiment, “during bonus state”) required to start one game by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 25 or operating the bet switch 15 or the like. Other than "3", "in bonus state" is set to "2"), the state in which rotation can be started by setting the number of bets is set, and by operating the start switch 19, the reels 11L to Rotate 11R to variably display the symbols and start one game. In the present embodiment, "3" is set as the prescribed number of game states other than the "bonus state", and "2" is set as the prescribed number of the "bonus state". The specified number is not limited to this, and may be another value, or the same value may be set regardless of the gaming state.

  After one game is started, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switches 21L to 21R while the reels are rotating, and all the reels 11L to 11R are stopped to end one game. To do. The slot machine 1 newly gives a predetermined privilege to the player according to a symbol combination etc. (display result) when all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped rotating. As the predetermined privilege, for example, transition of the game state, automatic setting of the number of bets for the next game without newly using medals, payout of a predetermined number of medals (or credit addition) for giving a game value, etc. However, it is not limited to these.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a main control board 63, a sub control board 73, a power supply unit 49, an external output board 90, and the like.

  The main control board 63 is a board on which the main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted. The sub-control board 73 is a board on which the sub-CPU 71 that controls effects according to the progress of the game is mounted. The power supply unit 49 uses power supplied from the outside to generate a power supply for driving various electric components mounted on the slot machine 1. The external output board 90 is a board that outputs a signal according to the progress of the game to the outside of the slot machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, a data display for each table, etc.).

  The main CPU 61 includes a ROM 67 that stores a game control program for controlling the progress of the game, and a RAM 65 that temporarily stores data regarding the game, etc., and is realized by executing the game control program stored in the ROM 67. It has various functions that are performed and various functions that are realized by controlling the hardware.

  The main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes the game control program stored in the ROM 67, and switches from a switch (operation means) and a sensor (detection means) connected to the main control board 63. A process relating to the progress of the game is performed based on the signal. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1. Examples of the error include a selector error detected by the input sensor 53 for a predetermined time or more, a full tank error detected by the full tank sensor 58 that the hopper container 42 is full, and a hopper motor 57 being driven. Nevertheless, it includes a medal-out error or the like which has not been detected by the payout sensor 54 for a predetermined time or longer.

  The switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 include the closing sensor 53, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, the door sensor 20, the stop switches 21L to 21R, and the adjustment switch 23 shown in FIG. The reset switch 52, the change process start switch 56, the position sensors 55L to 55R, the payout sensor 54, and the full tank sensor 58 are included.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 performs processing relating to the progress of the game and drives and controls the devices connected to the main control board 63. The devices connected to the main control board 63 include the switching solenoid 51, the credit display 45, the payout display 46, the notification display 60, the advantageous period notification lamp 80, and the reel motors 14L to 14R shown in FIG. , A hopper motor 57, and various LEDs. Further, the main control board 63 is equipped with a display composed of 7-segment LEDs. On the main control board 63, the ratio of staying in the advantageous period staying in the advantageous period with respect to the entire game period, the ratio of bonus characters to the total number of payouts, and the period of advantage to the total payout number of medals The display device is mounted to display a ratio (for example, also referred to as an instruction-included accessory ratio) of the total payout number of the payout number according to the navigation effect (instruction) and the payout number in the bonus state. Note that the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the instructed accessory ratio, and the like are not limited to those displayed on the display device mounted on the main control board 63, and are provided separately (for example, payout). It may be displayed on the display 46 or the like). In this case, the main CPU 61 may display the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the instructed accessory ratio, and the like on the display when the reset switch 52 is operated, for example.

  The main control board 63 transmits various commands to the sub control board 73 according to the progress of the game. The sub control board 73 controls an effect based on a command from the main control board 63. On the other hand, a command cannot be sent from the sub control board 73 to the main control board 63. The command is transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 in only one direction.

  The sub CPU 71 mounted on the sub control board 73 includes a ROM 77 that stores an effect control program for controlling the effect, and a RAM 75 that temporarily stores data related to the effect, and the effect control stored in the ROM 77. It has various functions realized by executing a program and various functions realized by controlling hardware.

  The sub CPU 71 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes the effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on a command from the main control board 63, and determines the effect contents according to the progress of the game. Etc. are performed, and based on the result, the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 are drive-controlled to produce an effect. The devices connected to the sub-control board 73 include the speakers 31L and 31R, the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, the effect operation unit 81, and the like shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display 27 includes a display control unit that executes a display process for displaying an image in the display area. The display control unit executes the display process based on the display control command from the sub control board 73, and displays a predetermined image in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. The display control unit can also send a command to the sub control board 73 according to the display content. The sub-control board 73 transmits a command corresponding to the speakers 31L, 31R and various lamps / LEDs, etc. based on a command from the display control unit to produce a sound or light corresponding to the image displayed in the display area. To execute. Various lamps / LEDs controlled by the sub CPU 71 include LEDs mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to various switches. The sub CPU 71 can light the operation unit by controlling the LED or the like so that the power consumption corresponds to the controlled mode, depending on whether or not the mode is the eco mode.

  In the effect operation unit 81, a decision switch 81a for decision, a left selection switch 81b for selection, a right selection switch 81c, an upper selection switch 81d, and a lower selection switch 81e (these are collectively referred to as up / down / left / right switches). Is provided. The sub CPU 71 executes a promotion effect that prompts an operation to the decision switch 81a when executing or developing a predetermined effect, and executes or develops a predetermined effect by operating the decision switch 81a. Control. Further, the sub CPU 71 is capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of effect modes having different effects (characters or backgrounds) to be executed by the liquid crystal display 27 or the like (during the effect mode selection screen is displayed). In the above, one of the effect modes is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches, and the selected effect mode is set by operating the determination switch 81a.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the administrator menu state by operating the decision switch 81a while the change processing start switch 56 is operated to shift to the setting change processing, and displays the administrator menu screen on the liquid crystal display. Display in the container 27. On the administrator menu screen, "date and time setting", "setting change history" display, "mobile / phone linked service ON / OFF setting", "eco mode setting", and the like can be performed. The eco-mode is a mode in which the power consumed by the performance execution by the devices connected to the sub control board 73 is saved as compared with the normal time. When the eco mode is set, for example, control for lowering the brightness of the liquid crystal display 27 and various lamps / LEDs, control for shortening the drive time or the lighting time, and output from the speakers 31L, 31R are made more than in normal times. Controls such as lowering the volume are performed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 does not rotate any of the reels 11L to 11R, and a specific effect that is generated in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, continuous effect continuous over a plurality of games, urging operation to a specific button). When the chance button effect or the like) is not executed, and the predetermined time has elapsed without any operation being detected (hereinafter, also referred to as a standby state or a game standby), the determination switch 81a. Is operated to shift to the player menu state so that the player menu screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. In the standby state, a guidance effect (included in the promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the decision switch 81a to guide the player to the menu state is executed. By operating the determination switch 81a during the guide effect, the player menu state is entered and the player menu screen is displayed.

  In addition, in the player menu screen, in accordance with the operation on the effect operation unit 81, for example, a portable link service for confirming the winning combination history such as the number of times of winning and the probability of occurrence, and for accumulating the playing history of the player It is possible to perform settings (hereinafter also referred to as cell-phone interlocking), volume settings output from the speakers 31L and 31R, brightness adjustment of the liquid crystal display 27, and the like. The setting of the eco mode will be described by way of an example that can be set in the administrator menu state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set in the player menu state.

  The sub CPU 71 selects an item or object to be displayed by operating the up, down, left, or right switches in the administrator menu state and the player menu state, and depending on the item or object selected by operating the decision switch 81a. Perform the processing. Note that the sub CPU 71 may shift to the player menu state by operating the determination switch 81a even when a specific effect is being executed. In this case, the sub CPU 71 draws an image of a specific effect on a specific layer and operates the decision switch 81a, so that the player menu screen in the player menu state in the layer having a higher priority than the specific layer. The player menu screen may be preferentially displayed by drawing the image. It should be noted that while the player menu screen is being displayed, a specific effect in a specific layer may be continuously executed, or a specific effect in a specific layer may be temporarily ended.

  Further, in the case of continuously executing a specific effect in a specific layer while the player menu screen is displayed, when the effect is a continuous effect without a chance button effect that prompts an operation to a specific button, While the player menu screen can be displayed by operating the decision switch 81a, when the effect is a chance button effect that prompts the user to operate a specific button, the player menu screen is displayed even if the decision switch 81a is operated. You may not. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the chance button effect from being unintentionally advanced to the next stage by the operation of the decision switch 81a while the player menu screen is displayed. Further, the switch for displaying the player menu screen and the switch for developing the chance button effect may be the same switch or may be physically different switches. Even if the switch for displaying the player menu screen and the switch for developing the chance button effect are different, operate the switch for developing the opportunity button effect while the player menu screen is displayed. It is possible to prevent undesired development of the performance.

<Game control processing>
The main CPU 61 performs a game control process for controlling the progress of the game based on the game control program stored in the ROM 67. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game control processing.

(Bet number setting process)
In the bet number setting process of S100, the bet number is set according to the detection signal from the insertion sensor 53, the operation signal from the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17, the re-play flag set when the re-winning combination is won. Processing for setting is performed. In the bet number setting process, a bet number setting command is output when the bet number is set. When the set number of bets has reached the specified number, the rotation startable state (validation) is enabled in which the operation of the start switch 19 is effectively accepted.

  In the bet number setting process, a drive signal for driving the hopper motor 57 is output based on the operation signal from the settlement switch 23, and the number of medals corresponding to the credit or the set number of bets is paid out. The settlement process for is performed. The bet number setting process is ended by receiving an operation signal from the start switch 19 in a state where the rotation can be started, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process of S200. In the bet number setting process, when the operation signal from the start switch 19 is received and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process, a bet command that can specify the actually set bet number (medal number) is output. As a result, the sub-control board 73 side can specify the number of medals for which the bet number is set for one game.

(Internal lottery process)
In the internal lottery process of S200, a random number value for the role lottery is extracted from a random number circuit that updates the random number value within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and is determined in advance based on the extracted value (hereinafter, referred to as an extracted value). In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win one of a plurality of types of hands. With reference to FIG. 6, types of winning combinations and winning combination names set in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  As the types of winning combinations, a bonus winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination are provided. The bonus combination is a transition combination accompanied by a transition to a bonus state in which the winning probability of the small combination is high. The replay role (hereinafter, also referred to as replay) is a role that sets the above-mentioned replay flag when a prize is won. In the bet number setting process, when the re-play flag is set, the stipulated number of the game (current game) to be started next (from now on) is newly used without newly using the medal (or credit) owned by the player. It is a role to automatically set the corresponding bet number as the bet number for the next game. The small winning combination is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (or credits are added).

  As the bonus combination, combination names “RBB1” and “RBB2” (hereinafter collectively referred to as bonus combination or “RBB”) are provided. For the symbol combinations of “RBB1” and “RBB2”, three combinations of “R7” and three combinations of “G7” are defined. When the player wins "RBB1" and "RBB2", the bonus state is controlled. The bonus state ends with a game in which the number of medals paid out exceeds the number of medals (the number described in the remarks column of FIG. 6) corresponding to the winning bonus combination.

  As the re-game combination, combination names “RPC”, “RTT1” to “RTT9” are provided. In the symbol combination of “RPC”, a combination of three “RP” is defined. Also for "RTT1" to "RTT9", symbol combinations as described in FIG. 6 are defined. When the symbol combination of “RTT1” to “RTT9” is stopped on the pay line NL, the “T” symbol is stopped on the lower, middle, or upper stages of the reels 11L to 11R, or the “BR” symbol is on the lower stage of the reel 11L, The "T" symbols are stopped on the middle stage of the reel 11M and the upper stage of the reel 11R, and the "T" symbols are apparently aligned at least partially on the appearance. Further, since “RTT1” to “RTT9” are the roles that trigger the advantageous RT control, they are also called promotion replays.

  As small roles, role names “BEL”, “ATA1” to “ATA12”, and “CH” are provided. As the symbol combination of “BEL”, a combination of three “BE” is defined. Also for "ATA1" to "ATA12" and "CH", the symbol combinations as described in FIG. 6 are defined. "BEL" is a prescribed number when the correct number is pressed in the game state (other than "bonus state") where the prescribed number is set to "3", and 9 medals are paid out. In the "bonus state" in which is set to "2", 12 medals are paid out regardless of the pressing order. "ATA1" to "ATA12" can be won according to the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R when the pressing order is incorrect (failure), and one medal is paid out. For “CH”, one medal is paid out when winning the prize.

  In the internal lottery process, a winning combination lottery is performed for each of a plurality of types of winning combination groups each including a predetermined winning combination among the winning combinations shown in FIG. With reference to FIG. 7, a winning combination group and a winning combination according to the present embodiment will be described.

  As a winning combination group including a bonus combination, "bonus 1" and "bonus 2" are provided. “Bonus 1” and “bonus 2” are winning combination groups each including one bonus combination. The winning combination group including the bonus combination may include not only the bonus combination but also a winning combination group that wins at the same time as another combination (such as CH).

  As the winning combination group of the re-gaming combination, "normal rep" and "promotion rep" are provided. The "regular rep" is a winning combination group composed only of "RPC". On the other hand, the “promotion lip” is a winning group composed of “RTT1” to “RTT9”.

  As a winning combination group of small roles, "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" and "1 sheet combination" are provided. "Left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" include not only "BEL" but also two or more kinds of roles of "ATA1" to "ATA12", which are combinations different from each other. Is a winning group composed of. "Left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are collectively referred to as "push order bell". The “single winning combination” is a winning combination group composed of “CH”.

  Of these plural types of winning combination groups, the winning combination groups targeted for the lottery are defined for each of the plural types of gaming states. Further, the determination value related to the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is determined according to the winning combination group, the controlled gaming state, and the set value that is set.

  The gaming states that can be controlled in the slot machine 1 include “initial RT”, “normal RT”, “advantageous RT”, “RBB internal winning state” in which “RBB” is won, and bonus prize winning. A "bonus state" and the like are provided. The "initial RT", "normal RT", and "advantageous RT" are collectively referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the winning combination group including the bonus combination, "bonus 1" and "bonus 2" are subject to the combination lottery in the normal gaming state. For each winning combination group including a bonus combination, for example, when the setting value is 1, the determination value is set so that the winning probability becomes 1/1000. The determination value of the winning combination group including the bonus combination is determined differently according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability. For example, when the setting value is 6, the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/900. The “bonus 1” and the “bonus 2” may be those whose determination values are set so as to win with a uniform probability regardless of the set values.

  Next, in the winning combination group including the re-playing combination, the “normal rep” is targeted for the role lottery in the general gaming state and the “RBB internal winning state”, and the winning probability in the “advantageous RT” is 1 / 1.7. The determination value is set so that the winning probability in the “normal RT” and the “initial RT” becomes 1/8, and the winning probability in the “RBB internal winning state” becomes 1/3. Further, the “promotion lip” is subject to the lottery only in the “normal RT”, and the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/20. The winning probability of the winning combination group including the re-game combination is the winning probability according to the type of RT being controlled.

  The determination value is stored such that the probability of winning either the normal rip or the promotion rip has a relation of “normal RT” ≦ “initial RT” <“RBB internal winning state” <“advantageous RT”. Therefore, the "advantageous RT" in the general gaming state is an advantageous state for the player because the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is improved as compared with the other gaming states.

  Among the winning combination groups including the small winning combinations, "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are subject to the lottery in the normal game state, the "RBB internal winning state", and the "bonus state". The probability of winning one of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is 1/5 in a general game state, and each of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won. The judgment values are evenly distributed so that the probabilities are the same. In the “bonus state”, the judgment value is set so that all of “right correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” are won with a probability of 1/1, and “left correct answer bell” is determined for each game. Win all of "1" to "right correct answer 4" to win "BEL". The “bonus state” is an advantageous state for the player because the probability of winning the “BEL” is improved compared to the general gaming state.

  The "single winning combination" is a target for the winning combination in the normal gaming state and the "RBB internal winning state". The common judgment value is determined regardless of the set value so that the probability of winning the "single hand" in the general gaming state is 1/50 of the probability regardless of which setting value is set. Has been. The winning group is not limited to the types shown in FIG. In addition, the winning combination group provided with the setting difference and the winning combination group having no setting difference are not limited to the winning combination group described with reference to FIG. 7.

  In the internal lottery process, the judgment value (the judgment value according to the set value) of the winning combination group that is the target of the role lottery in the current gaming state is read and the value subtracted from the extracted value (the extracted value is updated) Determination process is performed to determine whether or not is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 0), and if it is not a small value (for example, 0 or more), determination process is performed for the next winning combination group. This cycle is repeated.

  When it is determined that the value is smaller than the predetermined value in the determination process for any winning combination group, it is determined that the winning group is won, and the winning flag of the winning combination included in the winning combination group. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 65 to end the winning combination lottery. Therefore, the probability of winning the winning group is “the winning group determination value / 65536”. It can be said that the winning combination group has a high winning probability because the larger the determination value read in the winning combination lottery, the smaller the predetermined value. On the other hand, when the determination process is performed for all winning combination groups subject to the role lottery, but it is determined that the value is not smaller than the predetermined value, the winning combination is not won in any winning combination group. It is determined that The probability of being “off” in the present embodiment is set to be about 19% during the advantageous RT, but is not limited to this, and for example, an extremely low probability (5% or the like) is set. It may be defined.

  In the internal lottery process, if it is judged that one of the winning combination groups has been won, or if it is judged that the winning combination has not been won to any of the winning combination groups and it is determined that it is “out”, the part lottery is terminated. , S300 shifts to the advantageous period related processing.

  In the internal lottery process, a process for outputting to the sub-control board 73 a win type command capable of specifying the type of the win winning group in the win lottery. For example, when a "bonus 1" or "bonus 2" is won, a win type command that can specify that one of the "RBBs" is won is output, and when a "normal lip" or "promotion lip" is won A winning type command that can specify that the player is being won as a re-playing combination is output, and when one of the "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won, the push order bell is won. It outputs the winning type command that can specify that. As a result, on the side of the sub control board 73, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group.

(Advantageous period related processing)
In the advantageous period related process of S300, a process relating to the advantageous period is performed. In the present embodiment, during the normal period, it is possible to perform control in the advantageous period when a predetermined advantageous period shift condition is satisfied. The advantageous period includes an advantageous general, a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ), and an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT). An advantage is generally a period during which the CZ transition lottery for deciding whether to transition to CZ can be executed. CZ is a period during which the AT transfer lottery can be executed to determine whether or not the AT game can be executed. In addition, in the advantageous general, AT transition lottery may be executed in addition to the CZ transition lottery. In this case, for example, the probability of winning in the AT transition lottery is when the CZ is in the midst of the advantage general. May be set to be higher.

  The advantageous general and CZ of the advantageous period are periods in which the payout rate during the period does not exceed 1 (for example, also referred to as non-ball-out period during the advantageous period), while AT is used for AT games. As a result, the advantageous RT (RT1 having a high probability of winning the re-game combination) can be maintained, and as a result, it can be said that the payout rate in the AT exceeds 1 (for example, a payout period during the advantageous period). During the advantageous period, the advantage is generally controlled first. Further, in the advantageous general state, the CZ can be controlled by winning in the CZ transition lottery performed when the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied. Further, during the CZ, the AT can be controlled by winning in the AT transition lottery performed when a predetermined AT transition lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, it can be said that the advantageous period is a period in which the AT can control. Further, it can be said that the AT within the advantageous period is an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  The predetermined advantageous period transition condition is a condition that is satisfied based on the result of the winning combination lottery in the internal drawing process, and includes, for example, a condition that is satisfied by winning one of the winning combination groups shown in FIG. 7. The condition for transitioning to the advantageous period is also established by winning the winning group with a set difference in the winning probability, and it is also established by winning the winning group with no setting difference in the winning probability. To do. The condition for shifting to the advantageous period may be established by winning a specific winning combination group that is uniformly set regardless of the type of state in which the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is controlled. The phrase "the winning probability in the role lottery is uniformly set regardless of the type of state in which it is controlled" means that the winning probability in the role lottery is uniformly set in any state described later with reference to FIG. I mean what you have.

  Further, each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition also includes, for example, a condition established by winning a “single hand” and a condition established by winning a “bonus 1” or a “bonus 2”. Therefore, for example, when the player wins a "single hand combination", "bonus 1" or "bonus 2", the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, and the CZ transition lottery condition and the AT transition lottery condition are satisfied. As a result, even during the normal period, by winning the “one hand role”, the “bonus 1” or the “bonus 2”, the CZ transition lottery and the AT transition lottery are won, so that the AT becomes an advantageous period. It can also occur when controlled. The advantageous period transition condition, the CZ transition lottery condition, and the AT transition lottery condition may be the same condition, may be completely different conditions, or may include common conditions. .

  The conditions for ending the advantageous period are the first condition satisfied when the advantageous period counter = 1500 indicating that the upper limit value of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit number of games: 1500) is reached, as will be described later, and the bet number in the advantageous period. Is set as 0 as the base point, and the current total number from the base point reaches the upper limit value of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit total number: 2400). The second condition that is satisfied by doing so is included. The cumulative number is specified according to the value of the cumulative number counter updated during the advantageous period. Both the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 65.

  As conditions for ending the advantageous period, further, the third condition that is satisfied by digesting the game a predetermined number of times without being transferred to CZ during the general advantage (CZ non-winning), and being transferred to AT during CZ The fourth condition that is satisfied by playing the game a predetermined number of times without playing (AT non-win), the fifth condition that is satisfied when the remaining AT game number counter (described later) in AT becomes 0 and AT ends, and the like. Including. In the following, the conditions for ending the advantageous period (generally advantageous, either CZ or AT) are collectively referred to as “conditions for ending the advantageous period”. The condition for ending the advantageous period is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment as long as it includes at least the first condition and the second condition, and may be a condition that can be satisfied by another specific event. Good.

  In the advantageous period related processing, during the advantageous period, a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, a predetermined AT transition lottery condition (e.g., winning a predetermined winning combination group), and the advantageous period can end with the end of the current game. It is determined whether or not the situation (for example, the upper limit number of games (1500) or the upper limit cumulative number (2400) of the advantageous period is reached by the game this time) is determined, and when the situation can be satisfied, the condition may be satisfied. Perform a production that fuels something. For example, the main CPU 61 drives and controls the payout display device 46, the notification display device 60, and the like in such a manner that all the segments blink.

  In the advantageous period-related processing, the main CPU 61 determines that during the advantageous period, a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, a predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and a situation in which the advantageous period can end with the end of the current game. A condition-related command that can specify a condition that may be satisfied is output to the sub control board 73. Thus, for example, the liquid crystal display 27 can notify the possibility that the predetermined CZ transition lottery conditions, the predetermined AT transition lottery conditions, and the conditions for ending the advantageous period will be satisfied. As described above, the advantageous period-related process is a process that is performed depending on whether or not a condition or the like relating to the advantageous period can be satisfied. The process for actually shifting to the advantageous period, the process for determining whether or not the condition for terminating the advantageous period is satisfied and ending the advantageous period, and the like are performed by the advantageous period setting process of S700 described later. Be seen.

  Further, in the advantageous period related process, it is possible to execute the notification process for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the notification display 60 according to the result of the winning combination lottery during AT in the advantageous period. For example, when the player has won the "right answer bell 1" in the winning group, the notification display device 60 is configured to be stopped from the left reel 11L to win "BEL" as described later. The indicator 60 for driving is driven and controlled in such a manner that the segment (upper and lower left of the left side and one of the lower side of the left side) at a position corresponding to the capital letter “L” of the alphabet among the seven segments is turned on. Furthermore, in the advantageous period related process, an advantageous operation mode command that can specify the advantageous operation mode is output. As a result, an effect for notifying the advantageous operation mode can be executed on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like also on the sub control board 73 side. When the advantageous period related process is completed, the process proceeds to the reel control process of S400.

(Reel control processing)
In the reel control process of S400, a process of driving and controlling the reel motors 14L to 14R to rotate and stop the reels 11L to 11R is performed. In the reel control process, it is determined whether the wait time has elapsed. The wait time is set to 4.1 seconds, for example, and the measurement is started after the reels 11L to 11R are started to rotate in the reel control process of the previous game.

  In the reel control process, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is performed. As a result, the timing of starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R in the current game can be delayed until at least 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R in the previous game was started. In the reel rotation processing, when the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is started, a reel rotation start command is output.

  In the reel control process, after starting the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R and reaching a constant speed (for example, after the excitation pattern of the reel motors 14L to 14R becomes an excitation pattern of a constant speed), the reels 11L to 11R. When the respective reference positions are detected by the position sensors 55L to 55R, the stop operation becomes possible, and the operation to the stop switches 21L to 21R is effectively accepted (validation).

  Further, in the reel control process, when the stop switch is operated in a state in which the stop operation is possible, for example, the symbols located on the pay line NL of the reel corresponding to the stop switch are arranged within a predetermined retractable range. One of the symbols is drawn into the pay line NL to perform reel stop processing for stopping the reel. The retractable range is the range up to 4 symbols ahead, and when the stop switch is operated, the symbols arranged on the winning line NL to the symbols arranged up to 4 symbols ahead can be stopped on the winning line NL. Become.

  If you have won one of the winning combinations in the role lottery, when you can draw the symbols that make up the winning combination on the winning line within the pullable range, pull the symbol on the winning line. Stop. On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations has been won, the winning symbols, which are not winning any winning combinations, are drawn onto the pay line and stopped. Therefore, when the stop switch is operated, if the symbols constituting the winning combination are drawn on the pay line NL within the pullable range, the symbols are drawn on the pay line NL. While it can be stopped, the symbol combination of the winning combination is not stopped on the pay line NL.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, "when a winning combination is won in the winning combination, the symbols constituting the winning combination can be drawn on the winning line within the pullable range. It is something. Here, since the winning lottery is performed for each "winning winning group", the "winning winning role" corresponds in detail to one of the winning hands of the "winning winning group". Will be things.

  In the reel stop process, the symbols within the drawable range can be stopped on the pay line NL, but the symbols outside the drawable range cannot be stopped on the pay line NL. Therefore, in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R, if there is a part where the symbols forming the winning combination are not present within the retractable range, even if the winning is achieved in the winning combination lottery There is a case where the symbol forming the winning combination cannot be drawn onto the NL and the winning combination is missed (non-winning prize).

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols forming the “bonus combination” have a portion which does not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol array. For example, only one symbol “R7” that constitutes “RBB1” is arranged on the reels 11L to 11R. Further, as for the symbol forming "RBB2", there is a portion which does not exist within the retractable range in at least one reel. Therefore, the "bonus combination" may not be drawn in the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R even if the winning combination is won, and may be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when one of the "bonus combinations" is won, reel control is performed to pull in the winning bonus combination within the retractable range, but no winning combination is won. Occurs. As for "RBB1" and "RBB2", if the winning game cannot be won, processing to carry over the winning flag of the bonus combination is performed until the bonus combination is won by controlling to the RBB internal winning state. Be seen.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols “RP” forming the “RPC” included in the “normal lip” are arranged within the retractable range in all the reels 11L to 11R. Further, the symbols constituting each of “RTT1” to “RTT9” included in the “promotion lip” have a part which does not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement, but “RTT1” when the “promotion lip” is won. ~ Win all "RTT9". As a result, when the "promotion lip" is won, any one of the "RTT1" to "RTT9" can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols (“R7” and “MD”) that make up “CH” included in the “single winning combination” of the small winning positions are not present within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement. To do. Therefore, even if the "single winning combination" is won, there is a possibility that the symbols constituting "CH" cannot be drawn into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and there is a possibility that the symbol will be missed. .

  Further, in the reel stop process, when a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, depending on the type of winning combination (the result of the winning combination lottery), the operation timing and the pressing order (operation mode) of the stop switches 21L to 21R. The object to be preferentially drawn in is predetermined.

  Here, the reel stop process when one of the “left correct answer bell 1” to the “right correct answer bell 4” is won will be described. When any one of the "right correct answer bell 1" to the "right correct answer bell 4" is won, it is determined that the target to be pulled in preferentially differs depending on the type of the first stopped reel. The first stop means to stop the reels first when all the reels 11L to 11R are rotating. The first stopped reel is also referred to as a first stopped reel. Further, the second stop means stopping when one reel is stopped by the first stop and the remaining two reels are rotating, and the third stop is that one reel is rotating. Sometimes it means stopping. The operation of the stop switch for the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop is also referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  For example, when "left correct answer bell 1" is won, as shown in FIG. 7, when the first left stop (first stop of the left reel 11L) is performed, "BEL" is given priority over other winning combinations. It is stipulated to pull in. Since the symbols “BE” forming “BEL” are arranged within the retractable range, the “BEL” is not missed. Therefore, when "left correct answer bell 1" is won, when the left first stop is performed, reel control is performed so as to always win "BEL".

  On the other hand, when the "left correct answer bell 1" is won and the middle or right first stop (the middle or right reel 11M or 11R is first stopped), the player wins more than "BEL" at the same time. It is set to preferentially draw in “ATA1” or “ATA4”. The symbols "R7", "T1", and "T2" forming "ATA1" and "ATA4" are not arranged within the retractable range from the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R as shown in FIG. There is a place. For this reason, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, it is not possible to draw in the symbols constituting "ATA1" and "ATA4" to the winning line, and even if the player wins "Left Correct Answer Bell 1", any winning combination is won. There are cases where it is not possible.

  In addition, even when "Left Correct Answer Bell 2" to "Left Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "BEL" can be always won when the first left stop is made, but "BEL" is made when the first or middle stop is right Also, the other switch winning at the same time is preferentially drawn in, and the symbol array of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol array in which there is a portion where the symbols constituting the other winning combination cannot be drawn in, so the stop switch Depending on the operation timing, there may be cases where it is not possible to win a prize for any of the roles. Similarly, even when "Medium Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Medium Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "BEL" can be always won when the first intermediate stop is reached. However, when the left or right first stop is performed, other winning combinations that are simultaneously won are drawn in priority over "BEL", and the symbol arrays of the reels 11L to 11R draw in the symbols that constitute the other winning combination. Since there is a symbol arrangement in which there are places that cannot be played, there may be cases where it is not possible to win any winning combination depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. Also, even when "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are won, "BEL" can be always won when the right first stop is made, but when the right or middle first stop is made, "BEL" is better than "BEL". Also, the other winning combination that is simultaneously won is drawn in preferentially, and the symbol array of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol array in which there is a portion where the symbols that make up the other winning cannot be drawn in, so the stop switch Depending on the operation timing, there may be cases where it is not possible to win a prize for any of the roles. In addition, when all of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are won (for example, during the "bonus state"), regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 21L to 21R, " Reel control is performed so as to win the "BEL".

  The pushing order for winning "BEL" when one of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won is also called a correct answer procedure. When any one of the "left correct answer bell 1" to the "right correct answer bell 4" is won in the above-mentioned AT, the information capable of specifying the correct answer procedure is notified as an advantageous operation mode.

  When any of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won, none of the winning roles of "ATA1" to "ATA12" that cannot be operated in the correct answer procedure When the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is not possible to win the prize, when the "left correct answer bell 1" to the "right correct answer bell 4" are not won in the "off" symbol combination, it is not stopped on the winning line. The reel control for pulling the “out” symbol combination onto the pay line is performed. The specific “off” symbol combination is accompanied by a transition to “normal RT” when stopped on the pay line NL at “initial RT” or “advantageous RT”. Therefore, the specific “off” symbol combination is also referred to as a normal transition item (see FIG. 7).

  Further, in the reel stop processing when the re-winning combination or the small combination is won in a state where the winning of the bonus combination has been carried over (RBB internal winning state), the re-playing combination or the small combination is preferentially drawn in over the bonus combination. Has been defined.

  In the reel stop process, each time any of the reels 11L to 11R is stopped, a reel stop command that can specify the stopped reel and the stop position (for example, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage) is issued. Output. As a result, the sub-control board 73 can specify the reel that has stopped and the stop position, and can execute the corresponding effect. When all the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the process proceeds to the outcome determination process of S500.

(Determination process)
In the outcome determination process of S500, based on the symbol combination on the pay line NL, the process corresponding to the symbol combination is executed. For example, when a small winning combination is won, the payout process for paying out the medals described in the payout column of FIG. 6 or for adding credits is executed. In the payout process, a payout command capable of specifying the number of medals (including 0) given to the player by paying out medals or adding credits is output. As a result, the number of medals given to the player as a result of one game can be specified on the sub control board 73 side as well. Also, when the replay combination is won, a process for setting the replay flag is executed. In the winning determination process, a game result command that can specify the symbol combination on the pay line NL, the presence or absence of a prize, the type of the winning combination, etc. is output. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the symbol combination on the pay line NL. In the outcome determination process, the advantageous period stay ratio and the accessory ratio are updated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65 according to the result of the game. When the outcome determination process ends, the process proceeds to the game state setting process of S600.

(Game state setting process)
In the game state setting process of S600, a game state flag capable of specifying the game state after the next time is set based on the result of the lottery or the game. The game state flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies the currently controlled game state based on the game state flag. FIG. 8A shows the transition of the game state.

  The game state setting process sets a game state flag capable of specifying "normal RT" when the normal transition result is stopped on the pay line NL in "initial RT" or "advantageous RT". In addition, the game state setting process sets a game state flag that can specify an "advantageous RT" when winning the "RTT1" to "RTT9" which are promotion replays in "normal RT".

  In addition, the game state setting process can specify the "RBB internal winning state" when no prize is won in the game in which "RBB" is won in any of the "initial RT", "normal RT" and "advantageous RT". Set the gaming status flag. Further, the game state setting process sets a game state flag capable of specifying the "bonus state" when the "RBB" is won. The game state setting process counts the number of payouts in the "bonus state", and sets a game state flag capable of specifying "initial RT" when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number. In addition, the slot machine 1 sets a gaming state flag that can specify “initial RT” when initialized by changing the setting or the like. When the gaming state setting process ends, the process proceeds to the advantageous period setting process of S700.

  Here, the transition of the game state will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, first, the transition of the gaming state when not controlled by the AT within the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as non-AT) will be described.

  When the slot machine 1 is initialized by changing the setting or the like, it is set to the initial RT as a game state and the game is started. In the initial RT, the "push order bell" wins with a relatively high probability (1/5), while the AT game for notifying the advantageous operation mode is not performed when the "push order bell" is won. Therefore, the pushing order bell is missed at a relatively early timing, and the normal transition item is stopped, and the normal RT is controlled.

  In the normal RT, when the “promotional replay” is won and the “promotional replay” is won, the control is controlled to the advantageous RT. However, since the AT is still in non-AT after being controlled to the advantageous RT, as in the case of the initial RT, the "push order bell" wins with a relatively high probability, and as a result, the normal transition result is stopped at a relatively early timing. Will be controlled to "normal RT". Therefore, during non-AT, most of the games are played in the normal RT.

  Further, even if the player wins "RBB" during the normal RT or the like, he or she cannot win the prize unless the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the "RBB" can be drawn onto the pay line NL. As a result, when the prize cannot be won in the game in which the "RBB" is won, the "RBB internal winning state" is controlled.

  When the player wins the "RBB", the "bonus state" is controlled. During the RBB, as a result of being highly likely to win all of “right correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4”, it is possible to win “BEL” regardless of the operation mode, so that the medals are efficiently acquired. it can. When the payout number exceeds the predetermined number, the bonus is over and the "initial RT" is controlled.

  On the other hand, when the AT is controlled during the advantageous period, the advantageous operation mode for winning the “BEL” is notified when the “push order bell” is won in the “normal RT” and the “advantageous RT”. This is notified by the display device 60 and the liquid crystal display device 27. As a result, as long as the stop operation is not mistaken, the "BEL" can be surely won. As a result, the rate of paying out nine medals increases. In addition, since it is possible to avoid the normal transition result, it is possible to prevent falling from the “advantageous RT” to the “normal RT”, and it is advantageous that the ratio of winning / winning the “re-playing role” is kept high. You can play a game in the state. The CZ of the advantageous period ends by notifying the advantageous operation mode when the "push order bell" is won after the game has been played a predetermined number of times.

  Further, after the RBB won during AT is over, the number of AT games is carried over, so that the game is again in AT, the advantageous operation mode is notified, and the "favorable RT" is controlled. The period during which the "initial RT" and the "normal RT" are controlled until the "advantageous RT" is controlled after the end of the RBB won during AT is a preparatory step until the "advantageous RT" is controlled. Therefore, it is also called the preparation period. In addition, in order to be able to shift to "normal RT" when "push order bell" is won in "initial RT" which is controlled after finishing the RBB won during AT, "bell" is won. The advantageous operation mode for the operation is not notified.

(Advantage period setting process)
In the advantageous period setting process of S700, the advantageous period is controlled based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the normal period. In the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous general flag is set based on the satisfaction of the advantageous period shift condition, and the advantageous general control is performed as shown in FIG. 8B. When performing control in the advantageous general mode, an advantageous general game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled in the advantageous general mode is set. Advantages Generally, the number of games that can be controlled is determined by lottery from the number of games of 0 to 750, for example. Note that the number of games that can be generally controlled is not limited to those determined based on the number of games, and may be a predetermined number of games. Further, when controlled to the advantageous period, an upper limit value of 1500 is set as the advantageous period counter for specifying the number of games played since the advantageous period was started.

  In the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the CZ transition lottery is won during the advantageous general period, the CZ flag is set and the CZ is controlled. At this time, a CZ game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled in the CZ within the advantageous period is set. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is determined by lottery from the number of games of 0 to 750, for example. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is not limited to the number of games determined from these games, and may be a predetermined number of games. In the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the AT transition lottery is won during the CZ, the AT flag is set and the AT is controlled. At this time, in the advantageous period setting processing, a remaining AT game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled by the AT within the advantageous period is set. The main CPU 61 controls an advantageous period including advantageous general, CZ, and AT based on the values of these counters. The advantageous general game number counter, the CZ game number counter, the remaining AT game number counter, and the advantage period counter are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies whether the present is the advantageous period or the normal period based on the advantageous period counter, and which of the advantageous periods is based on the advantageous general flag, the CZ flag, and the AT flag. Specify.

  The setting and transition of the advantageous period will be described below with reference to FIG. In addition, the sub-control board 73 executes an effect based on a state command for specifying a controlled state and a period as described later. For example, the liquid crystal display 27 or the like may display a background image according to the controlled state or period. Specifically, in an advantageous general state of the normal period and the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of daytime is displayed. On the other hand, in the CZ of the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of evening or night may be displayed. The AT may display a background image (see FIG. 20, etc.) corresponding to the AT. In this way, the controlled state or period may be specified based on the contents of the effect. Further, in any state, various effects (chance button effect, continuous effect, battle effect, etc.) can be executed.

  In the advantageous period setting process in the normal period, when the predetermined advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the game this time, the number of advantageous general games is determined, and the number of advantageous games is set in the advantageous general game number counter. A flag is set to control during the advantageous period (advantageous general of the advantageous period). As a result, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the general control from the normal period to the advantageous period is performed. As described above, when the advantageous period starts, the value of the advantageous period counter is set to 1500, which is the upper limit value of the advantageous period.

  In the advantageous period setting process after being controlled to the advantageous period, the advantageous general game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and the value of the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1. In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the advantageous general game number counter is subtracted for each game to reach 0 (subtraction method), and the advantageous general game end determination is performed. Is not limited to the subtraction method, for example, the advantageous general game number counter is incremented by 1 for each game, and is performed depending on whether the count value reaches a predetermined value (the number of advantageous general games) (addition method) May be Note that, similarly, with respect to the end determination of each of CZ and AT, which will be described later, the subtraction method is also exemplified in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the end determination of each of CZ and AT may be performed with the addition method. . Further, in the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1 for each game, and whether or not the advantageous period ends is determined by whether or not the count value reaches 0. However, the advantageous period ends. The determination is not limited to the subtraction method, for example, 1 is added to the advantageous period counter for each game, and it is determined whether the count value reaches the upper limit value (the advantageous period upper limit value 1500) (addition method). Alternatively, the end of the advantageous period may be determined.

  In the advantageous period setting process in the advantageous general, it is determined whether or not either the CZ transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in the current game. When a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied in the game this time, the CZ transition lottery is executed to determine whether to control CZ and the number of games that can be controlled in CZ (that is, the advantage of CZ).

  The CZ transition lottery is performed by referring to a predetermined CZ transition lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The CZ transition lottery table is set so that the CZ transition lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established CZ transition lottery conditions. For example, when the CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied by winning the “single winning combination”, the percentage of 10% is determined as “non-winning” and the percentage of 90% is determined to control the CZ. When controlling to CZ, the number of games that can be controlled to CZ is determined. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is determined by lottery from the number of games of 0 to 750, for example. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is not limited to the number of games determined from these games, and may be a predetermined number of games.

  When it is determined to control to CZ, in the advantageous period setting process, after the number of games (for example, 3 times) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, continuous effect) is exhausted, the number of games determined by the CZ transition lottery Is set in the CZ game number counter and the CZ flag is set. The advantageous general game number counter and the advantageous general flag are reset. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8B, the CZ is controlled within the advantageous period.

  The CZ transfer lottery is collectively performed by using the extracted values extracted for the role lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a collective lottery method). For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single hand”, the determination value is set so as to have the above-described distribution ratio, and the advantageous period transition lottery is performed depending on which the extracted value belongs to. The advantageous period transition lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be collectively performed at the time of the role lottery in the internal lottery process. Note that the CZ transition lottery is not limited to the collective lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the role lottery, and for example, when the "1 piece role" is won in the role lottery, a random number for the CZ transition lottery is separately provided. Alternatively, the random number may be extracted and the CZ transition lottery may be performed using the random number.

  When the advantageous general game number counter has reached “0” and the determined number of games has been exhausted without being determined to be controlled to CZ by the CZ transition lottery, CZ non-winning in the advantageous period setting process The CZ non-winning notification process for notifying the winning is performed. The CZ non-winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 or the like so as to display “−−”, or outputting a CZ non-winning command capable of specifying the CZ non-winning to the sub-control board 73. In addition, processing for displaying a message such as "sorry!" On the liquid crystal display 27 is included. Thereby, the player can be notified of the CZ non-winning. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ.

  When the condition for CZ non-winning and ending the advantageous general is established, the advantageous general flag is erased in the advantageous period setting process, and the advantageous period is terminated and the period shifts to the normal period as shown in FIG. 8B.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to control the CZ in the CZ transition lottery during the advantageous general, for example, the CZ winning command that can specify the CZ winning is output to the sub control board 73 to display the background image on the liquid crystal display 27. Switch to the background image corresponding to CZ. At the time of winning the CZ, it is controlled to CZ from a predetermined CZ start timing (for example, after 3 games have been digested at which the continuous effect ends).

  In the advantageous period setting process in CZ, it is determined whether or not either the AT transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in the current game. When it is determined that the AT transition lottery conditions are satisfied, an AT transition lottery for determining whether to control the AT according to the established AT transition lottery conditions and the AT game number which is a period controlled by the AT is performed. To do. The AT transfer lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined AT transfer lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The AT transition lottery table is set so that the AT transition lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established AT transition lottery conditions. For example, when the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied by winning the "single hand" in the CZ, 10% of the time is determined as "non-winning", and 90% of the time is determined to be controlled by the AT. It Depending on which AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, the distribution ratio and the like are set so that the AT has different advantages (AT winning probabilities are different).

  Similar to the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery is performed by the collective lottery method. For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single hand”, the determination value is set so as to have the above-described distribution ratio, and the AT transition lottery is performed depending on which the extracted value belongs to. The AT transfer lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be collectively performed at the time of the role lottery in the internal lottery process. The AT transfer lottery is not limited to the collective lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the role lottery. It is also possible to extract and perform the AT transfer lottery using the random number.

  When the CZ game number counter is set to "0" and the determined number of games is consumed without the AT transition lottery determining that the AT is controlled, the AT non-winning indicating that the AT is non-winning in the advantageous period setting process. An AT non-winning notification process for notifying is performed. The AT non-winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 or the like so as to display “−−”, or an AT non-winning command that can specify the AT non-winning is output to the sub-control board 73. In addition, after the battle effect being executed on the liquid crystal display 27 is finished, a process for executing a result notification effect that displays a message such as “sorry!” Is included. This allows the player to be notified of the AT non-win. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ. When the condition that AT is not won and the CZ is ended is satisfied, in the advantageous period setting process, the CZ flag is erased and the advantageous period is ended as shown in FIG. 8B to shift to the normal period. In addition, even if it is controlled in the advantageous period, if the advantageous period ends without being controlled by the AT, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 does not light up, so that the advantageous period is not executed without executing the navigation effect. Even when the game ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT is controlled in the AT transition lottery during the CZ, the AT winning notification process for performing the AT winning notification that the AT is controlled is performed, and the predetermined AT start timing (for example, (AT game start timing). The AT winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display unit 60 or the like so as to display "77", or outputting an AT winning command capable of specifying AT winning to the sub-control board 73 to display a liquid crystal display. It includes a process for executing a result notification effect for displaying a message such as "AT winning" after the battle effect being executed in the container 27 is finished. This allows the player to be notified of the AT winning. The AT winning notification is given when the number of CZ games has been exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the AT has been won until the number of CZ games is exhausted. When the AT winning notification is made, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on.

  In the advantageous period setting process, when the AT winning notification is given, the number of AT games determined in the AT transition lottery is set in the remaining AT game number counter and the AT flag is set to control the AT. In the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous period counter is incremented by 1 each time one game is executed. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, after the AT winning notification is given, the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed after the control to the AT is started.

  In the advantageous period setting process during AT, when a predetermined additional lottery condition (for example, when "push order bell" is elected, when "one hand" is elected, when "bonus 1" or "bonus 2" is elected, etc.) is satisfied. In addition, an additional lottery is conducted to add to the number of AT games. Further, in the advantageous period setting process during AT, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the AT flag is erased, the advantageous period including AT is ended, and the normal period is controlled. The condition for ending the advantageous period during AT is, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, whether the remaining AT game number counter = 0, the advantageous period counter = 0, or the maximum number of accumulated numbers in the advantageous period. It is established when the lower limit is the base point (0) and the current cumulative number from the base point exceeds 2400. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied during the AT and the period shifts to the normal period.

  In the advantageous period setting process, as a result of being set by the game state setting process and the advantageous period setting process, which game state the next and subsequent games are in, an advantageous general (advantageous general game number counter) of the normal period and the advantageous period. Value), CZ (including the value of the CZ game number counter) in the advantageous period, AT (including the value of the remaining AT game number counter) in the advantageous period, and the like. Output possible status commands. As a result, on the side of the sub-control board 73, it is possible to execute an effect according to the next and subsequent states. When the advantageous period setting process ends, the process goes to the bet number setting process in S100 to prepare for the next game. The slot machine 1 repeatedly executes the processing of S100 to S700 for each game. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1, and when it determines that an error has occurred, it outputs an error command capable of specifying the type of the error.

  Here, the processing executed during AT among the advantageous period-related processing of S300 of FIG. 5 will be described using FIG. 9 and the like. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of the in-AT process executed during AT among the advantageous period related processes. When the AT flag is set, the main CPU 61 executes the in-AT processing of the advantageous period related processing.

  In SA01, the value of the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1. As described above, the advantageous period counter is a counter for specifying the upper limit period that can be controlled to the predetermined advantageous period. Although FIG. 9 shows the updating process of the advantageous period counter in the AT in which the AT flag is set, only during the period in which the advantageous period starts and ends, that is, during the AT in which the AT flag is set. However, the value of the advantage period counter is set for each game even during the advantage general period, during the CZ, during the RBB won during the advantage period, during the period after the end of the RBB until the transition to the "favorable RT" again. The process for subtracting 1 is executed.

  At SA02, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1. The value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 for each game in the AT for which the AT flag is set, and is again “advantageous RT” during the RBB won during the advantageous period or after the RBB won during the AT ends. Even if a game is played, it is not updated until it is moved to. Not limited to the subtraction method as shown in SA01 and SA02, for example, the remaining AT game number counter and the advantageous period counter are incremented by 1 for each game, and the count value is a predetermined value (the number of AT games acquired, It may be performed (addition method) depending on whether it has reached 1500).

  At SA03, it is determined whether or not a predetermined additional lottery condition is satisfied. When it is not determined that the predetermined additional lottery condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery process is executed in SA04. The additional lottery processing in SA04 is executed when the additional lottery conditions are satisfied, regardless of the value of the advantageous period counter or the value of the remaining AT game number counter updated in SA01 or SA02. Therefore, even if the number of games in which the value of the remaining AT game number counter is equal to or more than the value of the advantageous period counter is added, it is not necessary to perform a determination process such as whether or not a situation in which a profit cannot be substantially given. When the additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery process is executed uniformly, so that the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

  The additional lottery process is performed with reference to the additional lottery table shown in FIG. The additional lottery table is stored in the ROM 67. The add-on lottery table is set so that the add-on lottery is performed in accordance with the ratio according to the established add-on lottery condition. As the additional lottery conditions, the push order bell win, the one-card winning combination, and the bonus winning combination are defined.

  When the additional lottery conditions are satisfied by the push order bell win, 95% of the players will be non-winners, but the remaining 5% will be "10", "20", "50", "100" at the ratio shown in FIG. Is determined as the number of additional games to be added. When the additional lottery conditions are satisfied by the one-winning combination winning, the additional 30% is not added and the remaining 70% is the non-winning, but at a ratio shown in FIG. 10, any one of “10” to “150” is added. Is decided. When the bonus lottery conditions are met, the bonus lottery condition is always met, and the bonus game is always won, and any one of "10" to "150" is determined as the number of extra games at the ratio shown in FIG. In this way, the percentage of winning the additional prize and the percentage determined by the large number of additional games depending on the type of the additional lottery conditions that have been established are different, so the player should pay attention to which additional lottery condition is satisfied. You can

  The additional lottery is performed collectively using the extracted values extracted for the role lottery (collective lottery method). For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single winning combination”, the determination value is set so as to have a distribution rate corresponding to the “single winning combination” shown in FIG. 10, and to which the extracted value belongs? Add lottery by. The additional lottery is performed at the end of one game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be collectively performed at the time of the role lottery in the internal lottery process. The additional lottery is not limited to the collective lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the role lottery. Then, the random number may be used for additional lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 9, in SA05, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional prize in the additional lottery. If it is not determined that the player has won the addition, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has won the additional game, the value of the additional game number determined in the additional lottery is added to the current value of the remaining AT game number counter in SA06. As a result, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is increased by the number of additional games. At SA07, an additional game number command capable of specifying the additional AT game number is output and set. In addition, when it is not added, an addition game number command capable of specifying “0” is output and set.

  At SA08, the remaining AT game number command, which is the value of the remaining AT game number counter and can specify the remaining AT game number, is output and set. As a result of the additional lottery processing in SA04, when the AT game number is added in SA06, the remaining AT game number command that can specify the remaining AT game number after the addition is output and set. Further, in SA09, the remaining upper limit game number command which is the value of the advantageous period counter and which can specify the upper limit number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of the advantageous period is output and set, and the AT processing is ended. By outputting the commands by SA08 and SA09, it is possible to specify the number of remaining AT games in the AT and the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods on the sub control board 73 side. On the side of the sub control board 73, a predetermined effect is executed based on a command output from the main control board 63 exemplified by SA07, SA08, and SA09.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, etc., the processing executed during the advantageous period of the advantageous period setting processing of S700 of FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of the cumulative number counter process for updating the cumulative number counter for specifying the cumulative number among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. Further, FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of an end determination process for performing an end determination of the advantageous period, among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. The main CPU 61 executes the cumulative number counter process in the advantageous period setting process during the advantageous period, and the termination determination process as the subsequent process.

  In the cumulative number counter process, first, at SA11, it is determined whether or not one of the re-gaming combinations has been won in the current game (game that has ended this time). When it is determined that any one of the re-gaming combinations is won, the process proceeds to SA13. When it is determined that the player has not won any of the re-play combinations, the payout number of medals paid out (or credit added) in this game is added to the cumulative number counter in SA12. For example, when a small winning combination is won, the payout amount corresponding to the small winning combination is added, and when the small winning combination is not won, the payout amount is "0", and therefore the addition is not updated. As a result, the cumulative number counter is not updated when a small role is not won in this game (including when a re-game role is won or a bonus role is won). The number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is added and updated in the cumulative number counter.

  At SA13, it is determined whether or not the player has won any one of the re-play combinations in the previous game (the game immediately before the game that has ended this time). That is, it is determined whether or not the game this time is a game accompanied by a winning of the re-game combination. When it is determined in SA13 that the game was played by winning one of the re-game combinations in the previous game, the process proceeds to SA15. On the other hand, in SA13, none of the replay roles has won in the previous game, and it is determined that the current game is a game in which the bet number is set using the player-owned medals (including credits). When this is done, the bet number (inserted number) set in this game is subtracted from the cumulative number counter in SA14. For example, when the player's medal or credit is set to "3" as the bet number and the game is played this time, "3" is subtracted from the value of the cumulative number counter. As a result, when the game this time is a game accompanied by the re-game winning combination, the cumulative number counter is not updated, and the bet number is set by the insertion operation (maximum bet switch operation, medal insertion, etc.). When this happens, the bet number is subtracted from the cumulative number counter and updated.

  Note that FIG. 11 shows an example in which the addition processing in SA12 or the subtraction processing in SA14 is not performed when the winning of the replay combination is determined in SA11 and SA13. However, without performing SA11 and SA13, for example, when the replay combination is won in SA12 and SA14, addition processing for adding 0 or subtraction processing for subtracting 0 is performed (that is, addition processing or subtraction processing is performed. However, the value of the cumulative total counter is not updated substantially). Even if the addition process in SA12 or the subtraction process in SA14 is not performed, the addition process of adding 0 or the subtraction process of subtracting 0 is performed when the replay combination is won in SA12 and SA14. Even if there is, determination processing (determination of reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number) in SA22 of FIG. 12 described later is performed.

  At SA15, it is determined whether the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less. When it is not determined that the value of the cumulative total counter is 0 or less, the value of the cumulative total counter is a positive value, and the cumulative total at the present time in the advantageous period is not the lowest lowest value. The counter processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the cumulative total counter is 0 or less, the value of the cumulative total counter is 0 or a negative value, and the current cumulative total is the lowest value that is the lowest in the current advantageous period. , SA16, the cumulative number counter is cleared (set to 0). As a result, zero is cleared each time the cumulative number in the advantageous period becomes the lowest value, and the cumulative number at that point can be used as a starting point to specify the number of medals increased from that point from the subsequent cumulative numbers. Note that SA15 is not limited to determining whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, and determines whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is less than 0 (negative value). You may do it. At SA17, a cumulative total command that can specify the current cumulative counter value is output and set, and the cumulative counter processing ends. By outputting the cumulative total command, the cumulative total can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side. On the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the specified cumulative number.

  Next, the end determination process will be described. In the end determination processing, first, at SA21, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous period counter is 0. The value of the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the advantageous period, as described in SA01 of FIG. At SA21, as a result of the subtraction, the value of the advantageous period becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period has been reached in this game, that is, whether or not the first condition of the conditions for ending the advantageous period is satisfied. . When it is determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, it means that the first condition is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to SA26.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, it is determined in SA22 whether the value of the cumulative number counter has reached 2400. The value of the cumulative total counter is updated in the cumulative total counter process shown in FIG. In SA22, as a result of the update, the value of the cumulative number counter has reached 2400, and whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period has been reached in this game, that is, the second condition of the conditions for ending the advantageous period is satisfied. To judge. The second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the value of the cumulative total counter exceeds 2400. In this case, in SA22, it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative total counter> 2400. You may do it. When it is determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, it means that the second condition is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to SA26.

  When it is not determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, in SA23, it is determined whether or not AT is in the advantageous period. Note that the determination of SA22 is executed, for example, even when SA12 and SA14 of FIG. 11 are not performed, that is, even when YES is determined in SA11 or SA13 of FIG. Therefore, the processing can be shared regardless of the winning of the re-game combination. When it is determined in SA23 that the AT is in progress, it is determined in SA24 whether or not the value of the remaining AT game number counter is zero. The value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in AT, as described in SA02 of FIG. When it is determined in SA24 that the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0, it means that the fifth condition is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to SA26.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in AT at SA23 that the condition is satisfied during the CZ or the third condition that can be satisfied during the advantageous general condition among the conditions for shifting to the SA25 and ending the advantageous period. It is determined whether the condition 4 is satisfied. When it is not determined in SA25 that both the third condition and the fourth condition are satisfied, the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied, and thus the end determination process is ended. Thereby, the control for the advantageous period is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in SA25 that either the third condition or the fourth condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to SA26. At SA26, the advantageous period end process for ending the advantageous period is performed, and the end determination process is terminated. In the advantageous period ending process, various counters (including the advantageous period counter, the total number counter, etc.) and various flags (including the AT flag, CZ flag, etc.) related to the advantageous period are updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous period. At the same time, the game data used for the progress of the game is initialized. Further, in the advantageous period end processing, a command that can specify the game data immediately before initialization is output and set. As a result, the advantageous period can be ended, and it is possible to prevent the game data in the ended advantageous period from being succeeded to the game control by the main CPU 61 thereafter. Further, on the side of the sub control board 73, it is possible to identify various game data during the advantageous period and reflect them in various effects.

<Production control processing>
The sub CPU 71 executes the effect control program stored in the ROM 77 on the basis of the command from the main control board 63, and performs the effect lottery to determine the effect execution presence / absence and the type by random number lottery according to the progress of the game. Based on the lottery result, effect control processing for driving and controlling the effect means such as the liquid crystal display 27, the speakers 31L and 31R, and the various lamps / LEDs connected to the sub-control board 73 is performed. An example of effects executed by the effect control process will be described below.

(Direction on winning group)
In the effect control process, when a win type command that can specify the type of the winning combination group that has been won in the winning combination is received, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group. The effect control process is based on the receipt of the winning type command, for example, when the winning type command of “RBB” is received, an effect of displaying a confirmation screen including “bonus confirmation!” The effect of displaying an image of "yellow balloons" having a color similar to that of the bell on the liquid crystal display 27 is executed based on the winning type command capable of specifying the "push order bell". As a result, the player can proceed with the game while guessing the winning combination group that has won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the effect control process, when an advantageous operation mode command capable of specifying the advantageous operation mode is received during AT, an effect for displaying the advantageous operation mode specified from the command on the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. Run. As a result, when one of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won during AT, the stop operation is performed in the correct answer procedure, and "BEL" can be surely won. Also, during the "Advantageous RT" and the AT that is in AT, "BEL" can be won even if one of the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won. It is possible to reliably prevent the eyes from stopping and falling to "normal RT". The image for which the advantageous operation mode can be specified is also referred to as a navigation effect.

(Direction related to various conditions)
As described above, in the advantageous period-related processing of S300, the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, the predetermined addition lottery condition, and the condition for ending the advantageous period are satisfied. When the situation becomes available, the condition-related command is output to the sub control board 73.

  In the effect control process, a chance button effect, a continuous effect, etc. can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined conditions are advantageous benefits for the player, for example, that the CZ transition lottery conditions are satisfied, that the AT transition lottery conditions are satisfied, that the additional lottery conditions are satisfied, and that a bonus or one-win role is won. It is established when there is a possibility that is given (control to CZ or AT, addition control, control to bonus, etc.).

  The chance button effect is an effect for displaying a message image such as “PUSH” for prompting the operation of the decision switch 81a or an image imitating the decision switch 81a on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. As the pattern of the chance button effect, a normal pattern in which a message image such as “PUSH” is displayed in a normal manner (for example, white) and a special pattern in which a message image such as “PUSH” is displayed in a special manner (for example, shaded) Including and

  In the effect control process, the operation corresponding effect is executed by operating the determination switch 81a during the opportunity button effect. For the operation-responsive effect, for example, a winning notification effect that informs whether or not a CZ, AT, a bonus or the like is won (whether or not a privilege is given), and a CZ, AT, a bonus or the like is won. Winning suggestion production that suggests the possibility (the possibility that a privilege is granted). Note that the winning suggestion effect is not limited to this as long as it does not notify whether or not the player has won the prize (whether the privilege is given or not), and the expectation that the player has for the winning. It may be a stir-up production. Further, the continuous effect is whether or not a player has won a CZ, an AT, a bonus or the like as a result of the effect after executing a predetermined effect over a plurality of games (whether or not a privilege is given). Is an effect to inform. The chance button effect can be executed in accordance with the progress of the effect during the continuous effect, and can be executed independently (separately from the continuous effect).

  In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the chance button effect and a lottery to determine whether to execute the continuous effect. When it is determined to execute the chance button effect, the pattern of the chance button effect to be executed is determined. Further, when it is determined to execute the continuous effect, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined. When it is determined that the chance button effect is to be executed and the continuous effect is to be executed, the continuous effect pattern to be executed is determined from the patterns in which the chance button effect is included in the continuous effect.

  The chance button effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the decision switch 81a as described above. For this reason, for example, if the chance button effect is executed between the first stop operation and the subsequent stop operations, the stop operation with a good rhythm is hindered and the flow of the game is divided. There is a risk that Also, if the chance button effect is executed while the number of bets has been set but the start operation has not been performed and the start of the game has not been confirmed, the player determines whether or not the opportunity button effect is executed. It becomes recognizable and there is a risk that it will be used to determine whether or not to start the game. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, in the present embodiment, the timing of starting the chance button effect is limited to a predetermined timing during the game.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the chance button effect can be started. In FIG. 13, after the number of bets is set by inserting a medal or operating a bet switch, the start switch 19 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R, and the reels 11L to 11R to 11R to 11R to 11R to 21R to 11R to 11R to 21R to 21R to start rotation. Depending on the progress of the game until the rotation of each of the 11Rs is stopped, it is shown whether the chance button effect can be started or not started.

  In FIG. 13, in the number-of-games column, the N-th game and the N + 1-th game are shown, and the period from setting the bet number to operating the start switch 19 is “BET” for each game. The period from when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) and the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is started to when the first stop operation is detected ON is shown as “START”, and the first stop operation is turned ON. The detected period is indicated as "1ST" and "ON", and the period during which the detection is OFF after the first stop operation is detected as ON is indicated as "1ST" and "OFF". Each of the third stop operations is also shown similarly to the first stop operation.

  In such a flow of the game, as a period during which the chance button effect can be started, as shown in the example corresponding to the flow of the number of games “N”, the period shown as “START” and the third stop operation are ON. The period from the detection to the setting of the bet number is defined. On the other hand, as the period in which the chance button effect cannot be started, a period shown as "BET" and a period from the ON detection of the first stop operation to the ON detection of the third stop operation are defined. . The chance button effect, as shown in Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13, is started in a period of “START” and a period from when the third stop operation is detected to be ON until the bet number is set, Once started, it can be continuously executed at a timing after the period has elapsed. As a result, as shown in the flow of the number of games “N + 1”, when the chance button effect is started in the period shown as “START”, for example, it is continuously executed even after the first stop operation is detected to be ON. It On the other hand, the chance button effect is, as shown in Examples 3 and 4 of FIG. 13, a period shown as “BET” and a period from ON detection of the first stop operation to ON detection of the third stop operation. It becomes impossible to start at.

  Next, a specific example of the chance button effect will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 when the chance button effect is executed. FIG. 14 shows a display example when the CZ transition lottery conditions are satisfied in the advantageous general during the advantageous period. In FIG. 14, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described. In the chance button effect, various lamps are controlled in a mode corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect or BGM is output to the speaker. It is assumed that the signals are output from 31L and 31R. Also, hereinafter, an example in which the chance button effect is started by operating the start switch 19 to detect ON or by detecting the third stop operation to ON will be described. The effect is not limited to this, as long as it is started during the period shown as "START" or the period from when the third stop operation is detected to be ON until the bet number is set.

  During the advantageous period of the advantageous period, as shown in FIG. 14A, a background image reminiscent of the daytime is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. In the upper left area of the liquid crystal display 27, a message such as "day stage" is displayed, and in the lower left area, a state in which the character A reminiscent of a frog is walking is displayed.

  FIG. 14B shows a display example when the chance button effect of the normal pattern is executed when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) in response to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. The chance button effect can be started even when the start switch 19 is detected to be OFF by the ON switch 19 being detected. The chance button effect is executed by displaying a message image such as "PUSH" or an image simulating the decision switch 81a in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image.

  FIG. 14C shows a display example when the operation corresponding effect is executed in response to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 being operated during the chance button effect. FIG. 14C shows a display example when the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is executed by cutting in the image of the character B together with a message such as “CHANGE” in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the player may have won the CZ, AT, or bonus (there is a possibility that a privilege will be awarded).

  Similarly to FIG. 14A, FIG. 14D illustrates an example in which the liquid crystal display 27 displays the background image that reminds the daytime in the advantageous general in the advantageous period. FIG. 14E shows a display example when the chance button effect of the special pattern is executed when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in response to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. The chance button effect can be started even when the third stop operation is detected to be OFF, when the third stop operation is detected to be ON. The chance button effect of the special pattern is also executed in the layer having a higher priority than the background image.

  FIG. 14F shows a display example when the operation corresponding effect is executed in response to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 being operated during the chance button effect. FIG. 14F shows a display example when the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect is executed by cutting in a message such as "Congratulations on WIN" in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in the layer having a higher priority than the background image. As a result, it is possible to definitely notify the player that the player has won the CZ, the AT, the bonus, etc. (that the privilege is given).

  In the effect control process, as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e), when the chance button effect is executed, control is performed to turn on the LED mounted on the operation unit of the decision switch 81a that is prompted to be operated. To do. At this time, regardless of the controlled mode, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with a predetermined power consumption. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the decision switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of the controlled mode, the operation portion of the determination switch 81a can be turned on with high brightness, and the operation target can be highlighted.

  The chance button effect is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIGS. 14B and 14E. On the other hand, the effect displayed in the standby state and for guiding to the player menu is a smaller image than the chance button effect shown in FIGS. 14B and 14E. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed in a display area near the edge. FIG. 14G shows a display example when the guide effect is executed on the demo screen displayed in the standby state. In FIG. 14G, in the display area on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display 27, the guide effect is executed with an image smaller than the image of the chance button effect. Further, on the right side of the guide effect, for example, a message image such as "Menu display by operation of decision switch" is displayed to explain the function of the guide effect.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a table that is referred to when a chance button effect pattern is selected by lottery. In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and it is determined to execute the chance button effect, a lottery process for performing a lottery for a pattern of the chance button effect to be executed is executed. In the lottery process for lottery the chance button effect pattern, FIG. 15 shows when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the additional lottery are each won or when the bonus is won (when a privilege is given). When the winning table shown in (a) is referred to and neither the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, nor the additional lottery has been won and no bonus has been won (when a privilege is not given), FIG. The non-winning table shown in (b) is referenced.

  The patterns of chance button effects include winning patterns 1 to 8 (FIG. 15A) selected when a privilege is awarded and non-winning patterns 1 to 8 (FIG. 15A) selected when a privilege is not awarded. (B)) is included. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, the pattern of the chance button effect includes a normal pattern (patterns 1 to 4) that is a normal mode and a special pattern (patterns 5 to 8) that is a special mode. In addition, in the pattern of the chance button effect, a pattern for performing the winning notification effect as an operation corresponding effect executed in response to the operation of the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 (patterns 3, 4, 7, 8). And patterns (patterns 1, 2, 5, 6) for performing the winning suggestion effect. Further, the pattern of chance button effects includes a pattern (patterns 1, 3, 5, 7) that starts the opportunity button effect when the start switch 19 is detected to be ON, and a pattern when the third stop operation is detected to be ON. A pattern (patterns 2, 4, 6, 8) for starting the chance button effect is included.

  For example, when the winning pattern 1 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. In addition, when the winning pattern 8 is determined, the special chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, and the winning announcement effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the non-winning pattern 3 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the non-winning pattern 7 is determined, the chance button effect of the special mode is started when the start operation is detected, and the winning notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect.

  In the lottery process that refers to the winning table shown in FIG. 15 (a) and the non-winning table shown in FIG. 15 (b), according to the distribution rate shown in each of FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), It is decided by the pattern. Therefore, it can be said that the following advantageous effects are achieved.

  First, when a privilege is awarded in each of the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the additional lottery, or when a bonus is awarded (the winning table in FIG. 15A), the CZ A special pattern that is a special mode is determined as the mode of the chance button effect at a higher rate than when the bonus is not awarded and the privilege is not given in the transition lottery or the like (the non-winning table in FIG. 15B). Therefore, when the chance button effect is started in the special mode, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

  Further, the proportion of the winning notification effect executed as the operation corresponding effect is when the third stop operation ON is detected as compared with the pattern (for example, the winning pattern 3) when the start ON is detected as the start timing of the chance button effect. The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) becomes higher. Therefore, when the chance button effect is started when the start ON is detected, when the third stop operation is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is increased. You can Further, when the start ON is detected, the expectation for the privilege being provided is increased, and the expectation for the privilege being provided is easily maintained until the third stop operation ON is detected. Can be improved.

  Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the allocation ratio of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern of executing the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect is set to be higher than the ratio (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 4) started when the third stop operation ON is detected. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities to start the chance button effect of the pattern for executing the winning suggestion effect at the time of detecting the start ON and increase the sense of expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, the chance button effect in the special mode is such that when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 5 and 7), when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 6 and 8). Ratio) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is that the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 1 and 3) is more than the time when the third stop operation is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Ratio) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special mode when the third stop operation ON is detected, which is the timing after the start ON is detected.

  13 to 15, the example in which the chance button effect is executed independently has been described. However, as described above, when it is determined to execute the chance button effect and the continuous effect, the continuous effect pattern to be executed is determined from the patterns in which the chance button effect is included in the continuous effect. Even in the case of the continuous effect pattern including the opportunity button effect, the opportunity button effect is, as illustrated in FIG. 13, the period from the start ON detection to the first stop operation ON detection, and the third stop operation. It is included so that it is executed during the period from when ON is detected until the bet number is set. For example, the chance button effect is included in the continuous effect such that it is started by the start ON detection or started by the third stop operation ON detection. Further, the appearance rate of the chance button effect during the continuous effect is included in the continuous effect so as to achieve the advantageous effect shown in FIG. The image corresponding to the chance button effect during the continuous effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the background image and a higher priority than the continuous effect.

  With reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a display example, a display timing, and the like on the liquid crystal display 27 when the continuous effect of the pattern including the chance button effect is executed will be specifically described. 16 and 17, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described. During continuous production, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect is generated. And BGM are output from the speakers 31L and 31R.

  FIG. 16 shows the chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 1 or the non-winning pattern 1 when the start ON in the third game is detected among the continuous effects executed over the three games (three games). However, a diagram for explaining a display example of a continuous effect that is determined to execute the chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 4 or the non-winning pattern 4 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the third game. Is. The "1G", "2G", and "3G" in FIG. 16 correspond to the first game, the second game, and the third game, and the circled numbers "1", "2", etc. that follow are It corresponds to the timing in the game.

  The continuous effect is started when the bet amount for the 1G is set. In the 1G, the title of the continuous effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16A, a character A imitating a frog is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27, and above the character A, a fulfillment condition such as "make a star shine with strength!" A message is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that an effect having a story development relating to whether or not the stars can be made to be performed is executed. Further, below the achievement condition, it is shown that the expected value of the continuous production to be started is two stars, and below the character A, a message for enlivening the production such as "Ikeke!" (Serif) is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 16A is performed until the bet number for the 2G is set after the third stop operation is performed for the 1G.

  When the number of bets for the 2G is set, the effect is switched to that shown in FIG. 16 (b). As shown in FIG. 16B, four star frames are displayed above the character A. Then, when the start switch 19 is operated in the 2nd G, the two star frames from the left vibrate vertically and horizontally as shown in FIG. 16C, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, FIG. 16D. As shown in, the two stars shine. Further, in FIG. 16 (d), it is informed by the display of "NEXT" that the effect continues in the subsequent games. In the effects shown in FIGS. 16C to 16D, after the start switch 19 is operated in the 2G, the third stop operation is performed in the 2G, and the bet number for the 3G is set. Is done until.

  When the number of bets for the 3G is set, the effect is switched to the one shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16E, an effect is produced in which one of the remaining two star frames vibrates vertically and horizontally. As a result, the sense of expectation that one of the remaining two star frames will shine can be fueled and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. The effect shown in FIG. 16 (e) is performed after the bet number for the 3G is set and until the start operation for the 3G is detected.

  When the start operation is detected to be ON in the 3G, as shown in FIG. 16 (f), one of the remaining two star frames shines and the chance button effect is started. FIG. 16G shows a display example in which the decision switch 81a is operated according to the chance button effect and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 16G, a message such as “chance” is cut-in-displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

  FIG. 16 (h) shows a display example when the first stop operation is detected as ON in the 3G. The remaining one star frame vibrates vertically and horizontally, and a message such as "OK!" Is displayed. The effect that the remaining one star frame vibrates vertically and horizontally may be started when the first stop operation is detected to be ON at the 3G, and is determined according to the chance button effect. It may be started by operating the switch 81a.

  FIG. 16 (i) shows a display example when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3G. As shown in FIG. 16 (i), when the effect in which the remaining one star frame vibrates vertically and horizontally continues and the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3G, the chance button effect is started. .. When the decision switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 16 (i), when the privilege is not awarded (non-winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (j) is switched. As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 16 (j), the remaining one star does not shine, and a message such as "sorry" "Is this far ..." is displayed and the character A faces backward, An effect is given to notify the ending that corresponds to the winning. The effect shown in FIG. 16 (j) is performed until the bet number of the next game (4G) is set. When the number of bets for the 4th G is set, the continuous effect is ended and the screen shifts to a screen in which the continuous effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 16 (i) to give a privilege (at the time of winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (k) is switched to. . FIG. 16 illustrates a case where the RBB1 is won as a privilege. As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 16 (k), a message such as “OK!” Is displayed with the remaining one star shining (winning suggestion effect), and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (m), By displaying a message such as "success" or "I did it!", After the effect of notifying the end corresponding to the bonus winning is performed, the screen is shifted to the bonus confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 16 (n). On the bonus confirmation screen, a message such as “bonus confirmation” is displayed in the upper area of the liquid crystal display 27, and a plurality of characters are displayed in the lower area of the liquid crystal display 27. The bonus confirmation screen shown in FIG. 16 (n) may be played along with the next game (4G). The bonus confirmation screen may be displayed, for example, when the number of bets for the 4G is set, or when the start switch 19 for starting the reel rotation in the 4G is operated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, of the continuous effects executed over two games (two games), when start ON is detected in the second game, it corresponds to winning pattern 1 or non-winning pattern 1. Display example of the continuous effect that is determined to execute the chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 8 or the non-winning pattern 8 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the second game. Will be explained.

  The continuous effect is started when the bet amount for the 1G is set. When the number of bets for the 1G is set, the effects shown in FIGS. 17A to 17H are started. As shown in FIG. 17 (a), a message such as “Win the competition!” Is displayed as an achievement condition in the upper area of the liquid crystal display 27, and a rival character C (see FIG. 17 (a)) is displayed below the message. It is displayed that the character arranged on the upper side) and the character A on the player side (the character arranged on the lower side in FIG. 17A) are located at the start line of the track, and a predetermined time has elapsed. When this is done, as shown in FIG. 17B, a message such as "Win Kogaeru in competition!" Is displayed as the additional information of the achievement condition. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a message such as "Good" or "Start" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 17 (c) and (d). After that, the effects are switched to those shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to 17 (h). As shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H, a state in which the characters A and C are jumping to the right while competing with each other is displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H are performed until the second G2 start operation is detected after the first G3 third stop operation is performed.

  When the 2G start operation is detected to be ON, the goal is displayed and a message such as "I'm about to reach the goal!" Is displayed and the chance button effect is started, as shown in FIG. It FIG. 17J shows a display example in which the decision switch 81a is operated in accordance with the chance button effect, and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 17 (j), a message such as “Maybe a chance?” Is cut-in-displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (k), the state of the final stage where the characters A and C compete for each other is displayed. FIG. 17M shows a display example when the third stop operation of the 2G is ON-detected. As shown in FIG. 17 (m), when the characters A and C continue to compete in the final stage and the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 2G, the special chance button effect is started.

  When the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 17 (m) to give a privilege (at the time of winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (n) is switched to. FIG. 17 exemplifies a case where the AT has been won as a privilege. As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (n), a state in which the character A finishes before the character C is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 17 (o), a state in which the character C is happy while the character C is sitting backwards is displayed, and messages such as “win!” And “I did it!” Are displayed. Is displayed. When the number of bets for the 3G is set, the continuous effect is finished and the AT entry screen is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 17 (m), when the special privilege is not given (non-winning), it is switched to the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (p). . As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (p), a state in which the character C finishes before the character A is displayed. After that, in FIG. 17 (q), a state in which the character C is pleased while the character A is sitting backward is displayed. Then, when the bet number for the 3G is set, the continuous effect is ended and the screen shifts to a screen in which the continuous effect is not executed.

  Here, in the example of continuous effects in FIGS. 16 and 17, as illustrated in FIGS. 16 (j) and (k), and FIGS. 17 (n) and (p), it corresponds to the winning notification of the continuous effects. The example of executing the winning notification effect by switching to the effect part has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decision switch 81a is operated according to the chance button effect of FIG. 16 (i) or FIG. 17 (m), the winning notification effect is executed as an effect different from the continuous effect, and then the continuous effect is effected. It may be switched to the rest of the above. Specifically, the final cut-in may be displayed as a winning notification effect. When the winning is achieved, a character such as "VICTORY !!" is cut-in displayed, and when the winning is not achieved. May be displayed in a cut-in display such as "It's a little more ...!".

  In the effect control process, the background screen of the AT is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 during the AT. On the background screen during AT, the number of remaining AT games and the net increase in the number of AT games are displayed. The remaining AT game number is the value of the remaining AT game number counter for specifying the number of games that AT has been informed that control is possible. Further, the net additional number refers to the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the bet number from the number of medals actually given in a predetermined net additional number calculation period. The net increase number calculation period is a period from the start of ART under the control of AT and the control of advantageous RT to the end of the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. Say. In the following, a process and a display example related to the net increase display will be described.

(Regarding the net increase in number display)
The effect control processing includes the processing shown in each of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 as the net additional number display processing for displaying the net additional number during AT. FIG. 18 is a flow chart for explaining the net additional number display process executed when one game is started with the bet amount set (including BET and automatic BET by replay winning combination). FIG. 19 is a flow chart for explaining the net additional number display processing executed when a medal is awarded. The sub CPU 71 executes the net increase number display process of FIG. 18 when the bet command is received, and executes the net increase number display process of FIG. 19 when the payout command is received. The net additional number display processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

  First, in SB01, it is determined whether or not it is a period for calculating a net number of sheets increase. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from the start of the ART under the control of the AT and the control of the advantageous RT to the end of the advantageous period after the condition shown in FIG. 8B is satisfied. Once controlled to ART, the net additional number calculation period does not end, for example, by RBB winning or RBB control, and continues until the condition shown in FIG. 8B is satisfied and the normal period is controlled. Whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period is specified based on, for example, a command output from the main CPU 61.

  If it is not determined in SB01 that the period is the period for calculating the net extra number, the net extra number display process is terminated without displaying the net extra number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB01 that it is during the net increase number calculation period, it is determined in SB02 whether or not the player has won any of the re-gaming combinations in the previous game (the game immediately before the game that has ended this time). When it is determined in SB02 that the game was played by winning one of the re-game combinations in the previous game, the process proceeds to SB04. On the other hand, in SB02, none of the re-playing roles has won in the previous game, and it is determined that the current game is a game in which the bet number is set using the player-owned medals (including credits). If so, the bet number (that is, the bet number) is subtracted from the net increase in SB03. It should be noted that the net additional number is stored updatable in a predetermined area of the RAM 75. The number of bets is specified based on the bet command output from the main CPU 61.

  At SB04, it is determined whether the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (the end telop flag is being set). The confirmation screen is a screen for notifying that either RBB1 or RBB2 has been won, and is a screen for displaying a message such as “confirm bonus!” On the liquid crystal display 27, for example. When the sub CPU 71 receives a winning type command capable of specifying that the player has won the "RBB", the sub CPU 71 determines how many times the game is to be played before the confirmation screen is displayed (display timing determination), and the timing is reached. The confirmation screen is displayed when you do.

  In addition, the ending telop display means that the cumulative number specified from the cumulative number command reaches a predetermined cumulative number (for example, 2370) that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 30) up to the upper limit of 2400, or the advantageous period counter reaches the upper limit. By reaching a numerical value (for example, 5) immediately before (0. Soon to finish the game 1500 times.), The first condition or the second condition of the conditions for ending the advantageous period will be satisfied. Is a display for informing. The end telop display displays a message on the liquid crystal display 27 in accordance with the condition to be satisfied soon. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the timing to display the end telop based on the command for specifying the value of the cumulative number counter or the advantageous period counter, and displays the end telop when the timing is reached.

  When the confirmation screen or the end telop is displayed during AT, the display of the net additional number is temporarily ended. When the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the remaining AT game number is temporarily stopped, and the subtraction of the remaining AT game number is also temporarily stopped. After the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the net increase in number is resumed when controlled by the RBB, and AT is also set during the preparation period such as the initial RT and the normal RT until the advantageous RT is controlled after the end of the RBB. Will be updated and displayed. On the other hand, the remaining AT game number is displayed during the preparation period after the end of the RBB, but is not displayed as a subtraction update display. Further, in order to allow the player to specify that the subtraction update display is not performed, the display portion or the number of the net additional number may be grayed out, or the display such as “HOLD” may be superimposed on the display portion of the net additional number. During the preparation period, compared to when it is an advantageous RT, the probability of winning the re-play combination is low and the number of medals owned by the player is reduced, so it is determined that the AT game number is not subtracted. Because there is. The subtraction display of the number of remaining AT games is restarted after the preparation period has elapsed and the advantageous RT (ART) is controlled. The display of the ending telop is ended by clearing the ending telop flag when the advantageous period ends when the accumulated number reaches the upper limit of 2400, or when the advantageous period counter reaches the upper limit of 0. When the display of the ending telop is finished, if the RBB started during the advantageous period is continuously controlled, the net additional number in the RBB is continuously displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 18, when it is not determined in SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (when neither is displayed), the current status is either AT or RBB in SB05. It is determined whether or not. It should be noted that AT includes not only ART but also AT + preparation state after ART is once started. If it is determined in SB05 that the current time is AT or bonus, in SB06 the net increase display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase after subtraction in SB03.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed, or if it is determined in SB05 that neither AT nor RBB is in progress, the net addition display is hidden in SB07. That is, the control is performed so that the net additional number is not displayed. As a result, the net additional number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the net additional number calculation period, neither the confirmation screen nor the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, and during AT or RBB. .

  Next, the net additional number display processing of FIG. 19 will be described. In SB08, it is determined whether or not it is during the net additional number calculation period, and when it is determined that it is not during the net additional number calculation period, the net additional number display process is terminated without displaying the net additional number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB08 that it is during the net increase number calculation period, in SB09, it is determined whether or not any one of the re-gaming combinations is won in the current game (game that has ended this time). When it is determined that the player has won one of the re-game combinations, the process proceeds to SB11. When it is determined that the player has not won any of the replay combinations, the payout number is added to the net additional number in SB10. The number of payouts is specified based on the payout command output from the main CPU 61. The SB03 of FIG. 18 and the SB10 of FIG. 19 calculate the net additional number in the net additional number calculation period.

  At SB11, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. The ending telop flag is a flag for displaying the ending telop and is set in SB13. When it is determined in SB11 that the ending telop flag is set, the ending telop flag is already set, and thus the net increase number display processing is ended without determining the cumulative number. When the end ticker flag is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing of executing the chance button effect, and the end ticker flag is set in the game in which the chance button effect is executed. If there is a possibility that is set (when the cumulative number is a value at which the ending telop flag can be set when the maximum payout number for one game is added, for example), the chance button effect is not executed. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB11 that the ending telop flag is set, it is determined in SB12 whether the cumulative number has reached 2370. The cumulative total is specified based on the cumulative total command from the main CPU 61. In SB12, it may be determined whether or not the total number exceeds 2370 (total number> 2370?). The SB 12 makes a determination based on the same numerical value (that is, 2370) regardless of whether the RBB is in the internal winning state in which the RBB has been won in the AT or whether the RBB is in progress. When it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370, the process proceeds to SB13.

  At SB13, an end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the ending telop when it is determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, a message such as “Soon to reach the advantageous period upper limit of 2400 sheets” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. It should be noted that the display of the end telop continues regardless of the cumulative number thereafter (for example, regardless of whether it has fallen below 2370, etc.) until the end telop flag is cleared at the end of the advantageous period, and the advantageous period is The display ends when it is finished. Even when the ending telop flag is set, the ending telop is not displayed during the RBB because the effect corresponding to the RBB and the net increase in number display are performed. The display mode of the ending telop as the specific effect is not limited to such telop display, and the message may be displayed as subtitles (or scroll display), and the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is used. It may be displayed as. In the present embodiment, the ending telop is displayed when the cumulative number is determined to have reached 2370 in SB12.

  In SB14, when the ending telop is displayed when the cumulative number reaches 2370, the display of the net additional number during the net additional number calculation period is hidden, and the net additional number display processing ends. As a result, during the display of the ending telop when the cumulative number reaches 2370, the control is performed so that the net additional number in the net additional number calculation period is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent 2400 or more, which is the upper limit of the cumulative number (value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400), from being displayed as the net increase. It can be said that the process for hiding the net increase in number in the present embodiment is executed when it is determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370 in SB12, and the end telop flag is set in SB13. It can be said that the process is executed when the set telop is set and displayed.

  In FIG. 19, the sub CPU 71 determines the cumulative total (SB12), and when it determines that the cumulative total has reached 2370, SB13 and SB14 are performed to display the ending telop and calculate the net additional number. A display control command for instructing non-display of the net increase in number during the period is output to the liquid crystal display 27, and the display control unit of the liquid crystal display 27 displays the end telop based on the display control command. In addition, the example in which the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period is hidden is described. However, for example, the sub CPU 71 outputs only the display control command for instructing the display of the end telop to the liquid crystal display 27 by performing SB13, and the liquid crystal display device is based on the display control command. The display control unit 27 displays the ending telop, and hides the net additional number during the net additional number calculation period in accordance with the display of the ending telop (in accordance with this when the ending telop is determined to be displayed). You may do it.

  Returning to SB12, when it is not determined that the total number has reached 2370, the process proceeds to SB15. At SB15, it is determined whether the confirmation screen is being displayed. If it is not determined in SB15 that the confirmation screen is being displayed, it is determined in SB16 whether the current state is AT or RBB. It should be noted that AT includes not only ART but also AT + preparation state after ART is once started. When it is determined in SB16 that the current AT or RBB is in progress, it is determined in SB17 whether or not the net additional number has reached the preset OVER display number.

  FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining the number of OVER displays and the display mode of the OVER display. The OVER display number refers to a value determined stepwise for every 500 sheets, such as 500, 1000, 1500, 2000. During AT or bonus, the next target OVER display number among the OVER display numbers shown in FIG. 20 is set according to the net additional number calculated by SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. For example, when the net increase is not 500, "500" is set as the OVER display number, and when the net increase is 500 but not 1000, "1000" is set as the OVER display number. It The number of OVER displays is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75, "500" is set as an initial value, and thereafter, the value of the next stage is set in SB21 described later.

  Returning to FIG. 19, when it is not determined in SB17 that the net additional number has reached the set OVER display number, the net additional number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net additional number after addition in SB10 in SB22. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the corresponding OVER display execution flag is set in SB18. The OVER display is a display for notifying that the calculated net additional number has reached the set OVER display number. When the execution flag is set, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for executing the OVER display on the liquid crystal display 27. As shown in the display mode column of FIG. 20A, as the display data for the OVER display, the display data in the normal mode (such as red characters) is stored in the ROM 77 up to “1500”. "2000", which is a predetermined base, stores display data in a rainbow mode (rainbow pattern characters, etc.). Therefore, the OVER display up to "1500" is displayed in the normal mode, and the OVER display of "2000" is displayed in the rainbow mode. Even when it is determined in SB17 that the net additional number has reached the set OVER display number, when the chance button effect is being executed, the game does not shift to SB18 and the corresponding OVER display is performed. It is also possible not to set the execution flag of. In this case, when it is determined in the subsequent SB17 that the net additional number has reached the set OVER display number, and when the chance button effect is not executed, the process proceeds to SB18 and the OVER display is executed. It may be done.

  At SB19, it is determined whether or not the reached number of OVER displays is "2000". If it is not determined to be "2000", the process proceeds to SB21. On the other hand, if it is determined to be "2000", the rainbow flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 75 in SB20. The rainbow flag is a flag for displaying a display mode of a predetermined effect such as a net increase in number display with a rainbow pattern. The predetermined effect such as the net increase in number display is displayed in the normal mode (red characters or the like) when the rainbow flag is not set, and is displayed in the rainbow mode (rainbow pattern characters or the like) when the rainbow flag is set. . The predetermined effect such as the display of the net additional number includes the display of the net additional number and an end screen (also referred to as ending effect) when the AT or the bonus is finished. As shown in FIG. 20B, the predetermined effect such as the display of the net additional number is displayed in the normal mode until the calculated net additional number reaches "2000", and the calculated net additional number reaches "2000". After that, it is displayed in a rainbow mode.

  In SB21, the OVER display number in the next stage is set with respect to the currently set OVER display number. For example, when the set number of OVER displays is "500", "1000" is set as the next number of OVER displays, and when the set number of OVER displays is "1000", "1500" is next. Is set as the number of OVER displays at the stage. In this way, when it is determined that the calculated net increase number has once reached the set OVER display number, the OVER display number in the next stage is set. Therefore, for example, after the net addition number reaches "500", the "500" is once displayed on the OVER display, and then the number of medals owned by the player decreases to less than "500", and then "500" is reached again. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the determination of YES in SB17 and the OVER display of "500" to be performed again.

  At SB22, the net increase display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase after addition at SB10. The ROM 77 stores display data for the normal mode and display data for the rainbow mode, respectively, as display data for displaying the net additional number. Therefore, in SB22, the net increase display is updated using the display data for the normal mode when the rainbow flag is not set, and the net increase display is displayed using the display data for the rainbow mode when the rainbow flag is set. Update.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in SB15 that the confirmation screen is being displayed, or if it is determined in SB16 that neither the AT nor the RBB is being displayed, the net additional number display has already been hidden in SB07 of FIG. The net addition number display processing ends without displaying.

  18 and 19, the example of calculating and displaying the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period has been described. Next, an example of calculating and displaying the number of net increase in the RBB will be described. FIG. 21 (a) is a flowchart for explaining the RBB net increase number display process executed when one game is started by setting the bet number in the RBB, and FIG. 21 (b) is an RBB. 9 is a flow chart for explaining a net additional number display process executed when a medal is given inside. When the bet command is received, the sub CPU 71 executes the RBB net increase number display process of FIG. 21A, and when the payout command is received, the RBB net increase number display process of FIG. 21B is executed.

  First, the RBB mid-increased number display processing of FIG. 21A will be described. At SB23, it is determined whether the RBB is in progress. If it is not determined in SB23 that the RBB is in progress, the net increase in RBB number display process is terminated without displaying the net increase number in RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB23 that the game is in the RBB, the bet number of the current game (that is, the bet number) is subtracted from the net additional number in the RBB in SB24. The net additional number in the RBB is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75 so that it can be updated. In SB25, the display of the net increased number in the RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increased number after the subtraction in SB24, and the RBB in-increased number displaying process is ended.

  Next, the RBB mid-increased number display processing of FIG. 21B will be described. At SB26, it is determined whether the RBB is in progress. When it is not determined in SB26 that the RBB is in progress, the net increase in RBB net count display processing is terminated without displaying the net increase in RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB26 that the RBB is in progress, in SB27, the payout number is added to the net additional number in the RBB. At SB28, the display of the net increased number in the RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increased number after the addition in SB27, and the RBB in-between-added-number display process is ended.

  The RBBs in the SB 23 and the SB 26 include, for example, not only RBBs controlled when not in AT, but also BBs controlled during the net increase number calculation period and RBBs controlled during the end telop display. . Therefore, the net extra number in the RBB is displayed together with the net extra number in the net extra number calculation period during the net extra number calculation period, and only the net extra number in the RBB is displayed during the end telop display. Become. For example, in the RBB during the net extra number calculation period, as will be described later (FIG. 27C, etc.), the net extra number during the net extra number calculation period and the net extra number during the RBB are displayed, but the end telop In the RBB when the flag is set and the ending telop is displayed, only the net additional number in the RBB is displayed. The ending telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the effect including the corresponding net additional number in the RBB, and in the RBB, for example, in the upper left area of the liquid crystal display 27, the telop may be displayed more than usual. You may make it display in a small mode. Further, even when the end telop flag is set, the condition that the end telop is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds or while one game is consumed) during the RBB based on the end telop flag. As an alternative, the ending telop may be hidden. Note that an example of calculating and displaying the net increase in coins as information regarding the payout displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the RBB will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of coins paid out and the remaining payout until the end of the RBB. It may be the number of sheets.

  Next, processing when the AT or bonus ends and the net additional number calculation period ends will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart for explaining the end screen processing for displaying the end screen at the end of the AT or the bonus.

  At SB30, it is determined whether the AT or the bonus has ended. When it is determined that neither the AT nor the bonus has ended, the end screen processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB30 that either the AT or the bonus has ended, it is determined in SB31 whether the rainbow flag is set or the ending telop flag based on the cumulative number is set. When it is not determined that the rainbow flag is set in SB31 and the ending telop flag based on the cumulative number is not set, the game result is displayed in the normal mode as the ending screen in SB32. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB31 that the rainbow flag or the end telop flag based on the cumulative total is set, it is determined in SB33 whether the end telop flag based on the cumulative total is set. When it is determined that the ending telop flag based on the cumulative total is set, the game result is displayed in the mode of the ending telop based on the cumulative total on the ending screen in SB34 (described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30). ). On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB33 that the ending telop flag based on the cumulative total is set, the game result is displayed in a rainbow manner as the ending screen in SB35.

  As the game result in the normal mode or the rainbow mode, when the AT ends, the net additional number calculated in the net additional number calculation period and the AT game number controlled by the AT in the net additional number calculation period are displayed. . Further, when the bonus ends (including a bonus that starts during the advantageous period but ends after the advantageous period ends), the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. Further, as the game result at the end of the bonus controlled during AT, the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed, and after the net additional number calculated during the net additional number calculation period is displayed, the restart of AT is notified. .

  On the other hand, as a game result in the mode of displaying the end telop, when the AT ends, the AT is controlled during the net increase number calculation period without displaying the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period. Only the number of AT games that have been displayed are displayed. In addition, in the RBB won or controlled during AT, the game result when the RBB ends after the end telop is displayed does not display the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period, and the RBB does not appear. Only the net increase in number is displayed. That is, the net added number in the RBB alone is displayed without displaying the sum of the net added number in the net added number calculation period and the net added number in the RBB alone.

  Next, of the effect control processing, various data update processing for updating various data will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of various data update processing. The various data includes effect data used when determining the type and content of the effect executed by the sub CPU 71, and game history data used to provide a mobile link service for accumulating the game history of the player. The sub CPU 71 executes various data update processing, for example, every time one game is completed and when an operation for ending the mobile linked service (accumulation of game history) is accepted.

  In the various data update processing, first, the effect data is updated according to the progress of the game ended in SB40 (for example, game result). The effect data updated (specified) in the various data update processing includes the number of games, which is the number of times the game has been executed, the number of winnings for each winning combination shown in FIG. 6, the winning probability (or winning probability), and the like. , RBB winning probability and the number of net additions in RBB. Further, during the advantageous period, the number of ATs that is the total number of times controlled by the AT, the number of AT games that is the number of times the game is consumed at the AT, the total number of the ATs during the advantageous period specified from the total number command, and the number of games It includes the number of stories in a story executed according to the progress, the number of consecutive chans controlled by the AT again from the end of the previous AT until the game is exhausted 100 times. In addition, the production data includes not only the data updated in SB40 but also the net increase number, the OVER display number, the rainbow flag, the end telop flag, etc., which are updated (specified) in FIGS. 18, 19, 22 and the like.

  At SB41, it is determined whether or not the mobile communication is being performed. Mobile interlocking is a mode started by entering a password issued by the management server. The password is stored in the management server by transmitting the login information for identifying the player to the management server using a communication terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, etc.) owned by the player. It is issued according to the game history of and is displayed on the communication terminal owned by the player. In the slot machine 1, by inputting the password on the mobile phone interlocking setting screen described later, the mobile phone interlocking start condition is satisfied, and the game history of the player stored in the management server is updated according to the progress of the game. It will be possible.

  If it is not determined in SB41 that the mobile communication is being performed, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB41 that the mobile communication is being performed, the mobile history game data for mobile communication is updated in SB42 in accordance with the game result of the finished game, and the process proceeds to SB43. The game history data for mobile communication includes, in addition to the above-mentioned various effect data, the character and costume set by the player, the type of mission achieved, and the like.

  At SB43, it is determined whether or not the cell-phone interlocking has ended. The mobile link ends, for example, by accepting an operation for selecting the mobile link end on the mobile link setting screen during mobile link. When it is not determined in SB43 that the cell-phone interlocking has ended, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB43 that the cell-phone interlocking has ended, the process shifts to SB44, in which the two-dimensional code that enables identification of the game history is generated based on the cell-coupling game history data updated in SB42, and the liquid crystal is generated. While displaying on the display 27, the game history data for mobile interlocking is initialized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being carried over after the two-dimensional code is generated and displayed.

  At SB45, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has ended, regardless of whether or not the mobile communication is in progress. When it is not determined that the advantageous period has ended, the process proceeds to SB47. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous period has ended, the process proceeds to SB46, and the effect data (hereinafter, also referred to as the number-related effect data) having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is generated. It is initialized. Specifically, among the effect data updated in the SB 40 during the advantageous period, the cumulative number during the advantageous period, the net additional number updated (specified) in FIG. 18, FIG. 19, and FIG. 22 and the OVER display number, The rainbow flag and end telop flag are initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect data concerning the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period from being carried over thereafter. Further, 0 is set as the net increase number and “500” is set as the OVER display number. As a result, it is possible to prepare for the display when the net increase number calculation period is started by the next AT control.

  Of the effect data, the effect data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as the number-unrelated effect data) can be used even after the advantageous period ends. You can take over. The number-unrelated effect data includes, for example, the number of games, the combination history, the winning probability of the RBB, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of stories, the number of consecutive chantings, and the net number of increase in the RBB. The effect data that is inherited after the advantageous period ends is used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period. It should be noted that, depending on the end of the advantageous period, the game history data for mobile interlocking is not initialized. As a result, with regard to the game history data for cell-phone interlocking, even if the data has a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, it is carried over to the two-dimensional code at the end of cell-phone interlocking. , And can be displayed on the player's communication terminal or the like.

  In SB47, it is determined whether or not the game has been played 100 times without newly winning the AT after the previous advantageous period ends, regardless of whether or not the mobile communication is being performed. When it is not determined that the game has been exhausted 100 times without newly winning the AT after the previous advantageous period ends, the various data update processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game has been played 100 times without newly winning the AT after the previous advantageous period ends, the process proceeds to SB48, and the number-of-sheets-related effect data in the previous advantageous period is initialized. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the type and content of the effect to be executed are determined based on the effect data inherited from the end of the previous advantageous period until the so-called continuous change. However, the mobile history game history data (storage area for storing the game history data) that is updated during mobile phone linkage is not initialized in SB48. In addition, in SB47, an example of determining whether or not the game has been exhausted 100 times without newly winning the AT has been described since the end of the previous advantageous period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the requirement, for example, it may be determined whether or not the game has been played 100 times without newly shifting to the next advantageous period after the last advantageous period ends.

  As shown by SA21, SA22, and SA15 in FIG. 12, at least when the first condition is satisfied by digesting the game 1500 times in the advantageous period, and based on the lowest value of the cumulative number in the advantageous period as the starting point. When the second condition is satisfied due to the cumulative number of 2 reaching 2,400, the advantageous period ends even if the number of remaining AT games exists. Further, as shown by SB12 to SB14 in FIG. 19, when the first condition and the second condition are soon satisfied, the corresponding ending telop is displayed. This point will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase / decrease in the cumulative number counter and the net number increase in the advantageous period. In FIG. 24, the vertical axis represents the type of controlled period, the cumulative number counter, the presence / absence of the ending telop, the net increase number, and a slump graph in which the net increase number is graphed from the top, and the horizontal axis indicates The progress of time (game digestion) is shown from left to right. In FIG. 24, the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 24), and when the second condition is soon satisfied in the first advantageous period, the player wins the RBB1. After being controlled by the RBB, the second condition is satisfied during the RBB, and the first advantageous period ends, when the predetermined period elapses in the normal period, the advantageous period is again returned (referred to as a second advantageous period in FIG. 24). It is shown as an example.

  First, when the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 of FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 of FIG. 11, the advantageous period counter and the total number counter according to the progress of the game. The value of is updated. In the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, an example in which the AT is controlled in addition to the control during the advantageous period is shown. When controlled to AT (net increase number calculation period), the net increase number is updated in accordance with the progress of the game as shown in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. During AT, for example, the navigation effect is executed when the push-order bell is won, so that the value of the cumulative number counter increases and the net additional number also increases as shown in the slump graph. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 of FIG. 18 and SB22 of FIG. 19, the net additional number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  After that, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 by the time the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit value (1500) according to the progress of the game, as shown in SB13 and SB14 in FIG. 19, the cumulative number counter is displayed. The end telop flag corresponding to the arrival of the upper limit of is set, the corresponding end telop is displayed, and the net increase in the number of sheets controlled by the AT is hidden. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon reached is reached, it is possible to notify that fact by displaying the ending telop, and it is possible to reliably prevent the numerical value exceeding 2400 from being displayed as the net additional number. You can The ending telop is displayed until the first advantageous period ends due to reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number counter.

  FIG. 24 shows a case where the RBB1 is won and controlled by the RBB during the AT when the timing when the second condition is soon satisfied is reached. The RBB associated with the RBB1 winning is continued until 200 coins are paid out, as shown in FIG. Therefore, even after the first advantageous period ends due to the reaching of the upper limit of the cumulative number counter, the actual net additional number increases by being controlled by the RBB. Specifically, in the AT that has reached the timing when the second condition is soon satisfied, for example, when the player wins RBB1 and is controlled by RBB, as shown in FIG. Even after the arrival and the advantageous period ends, the actual net additional number may exceed the value obtained by adding 2400 to the maximum payout number of one game.

  However, as described above, when the timing at which the second condition is soon reached is reached, the net additional number is hidden. In addition, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400 and the second condition is satisfied and the advantageous period ends, the game data during the advantageous period is initialized in SA15 of FIG. In SB46, the number-related effect data for the advantageous period is initialized. Therefore, even if the actual net extra number exceeds the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400, it is possible to reliably prevent the numerical value exceeding 2400 from being displayed as the net extra number. be able to. In addition, in the RBB that is won and controlled in the RBB in the AT when the timing when the second condition is soon met, as shown in the net increase number display column of FIG. Instead, only the net increase in number in the RBB after the start of the RBB is displayed. Further, in the end screen displayed when the RBB ends, not the actual net extra number from the AT, but only the net extra number in the RBB after the start of the RBB.

  By the end of the controlled RBB just before the end of the first advantageous period, the normal period has already been reached. In FIG. 24, by controlling the game a predetermined number of times during the normal period after the end of RBB, the game is controlled again to the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24). In the second advantageous period, an example in which the AT is controlled after the advantageous general and CZ are controlled for a predetermined period is shown. When controlled in the advantageous period, as described above, the values of the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated according to the progress of the game. Even if controlled during the advantageous period, the navigation effect is not executed during the advantageous general or during CZ, so the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and "0" is set as shown at SA16 in FIG. Further, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in number also decreases during the advantageous general or CZ as in the normal period.

  In the second advantageous period of FIG. 24, it is assumed that the AT is controlled after the advantageous general and CZ are passed. When controlled by the AT, the net additional number is updated and displayed. During AT, the navigation effect is executed when the push-order bell is won and the net additional number increases, so the value of the cumulative number counter and the net additional number increase. Then, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 before the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit value according to the progress of the game, the corresponding ending telop is displayed as in the first advantageous period. , The net increase in number after being controlled by the AT is hidden. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon reached is reached, it is possible to notify that fact by displaying the ending telop, and it is possible to reliably prevent the numerical value exceeding 2400 from being displayed as the net additional number. You can The ending telop is displayed until the second advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number counter is reached.

  When the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400 and the second condition is satisfied and the second advantageous period ends, the game data during the second advantageous period is initialized and the second advantageous period is ended. The number-related production data during the period is initialized. Further, after the second advantageous period ends, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push order bell is won because the normal period is controlled. Therefore, the net additional number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 24, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

  Next, a display example on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a display example of the net increase in the number of images on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. FIG. 25 shows a display example when the AT ends after the ART starts and before the number of net increase reaches “2000”. 25A and 25B are display examples when ART is started. When the RT is controlled by the advantageous RT due to the promotion replay winning and the ART is started, as shown in FIG. 25A, an image as if the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background and "AT rush!" A message is displayed, and then the background image for AT is switched as shown in FIG. After that, the net increase number calculation period starts, and the calculation of the net increase number is started in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG.

  As the background image for AT, for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, the number of remaining AT games (LAST: 100G) is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the net increase in the AT is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The number of sheets (TOTAL: 0) is displayed. Further, when the winning situation is such that the advantageous operation mode is notified, the advantageous operation mode indicated by the circled numeral image in FIG. 25B is notified.

  FIG. 25C shows a display example when a BE (hereinafter, also referred to as a bell) prize is won in the game shown in FIG. 25B. When a bell is won, a message such as "Bell GET!" Is displayed in the center of the screen, and the net increase in number is added to "9" along with the addition of nine medals.

  FIG. 25D is a display example immediately before the number of net added sheets reaches “500”. The net addition number at the upper right of the display area is displayed as "493", and the advantageous operation mode is notified by the push-order bell winning. FIG. 25 (e) is a display example when the bell is won in the game shown in FIG. 25 (d) and the net additional number reaches “500”. Since 9 medals are paid out by the bell winning, the net additional number is added and displayed in "502". Further, when the number of OVER display of "500" is reached, a message "500 OVER!" Is displayed as the OVER display of "500" in SB18 of FIG. 25 (e ') and (e ") show examples of OVER display (normal mode) of" 1000 "and" 1500 ", respectively.

  FIG. 25F is a display example when the next game (game) after the game shown in FIG. 25E is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed at "35G", and since the bet number is set to "3", the net additional number is subtracted and displayed at "499".

  FIG. 25 (g) is a display example when a medal is given and the net additional number reaches "500" again after the game of FIG. 25 (f). As indicated by SB17 and SB21 in FIG. 19, once the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the next stage OVER display number is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25 (g), it is possible to prevent the OVER display of "500" from being performed again even if "500" is reached again.

  FIG. 25 (h) is a display example of an end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and AT ends. As the end screen, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and a message such as "Result AT number of games: 300 TOTAL: 594" is displayed in a normal mode as a game result (see FIG. 22). SB32). When AT ends, the advantageous period ends, and as a result, the net additional number calculation period also ends.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, a caution display is displayed in order to prevent the player from being overly absorbed in the game by calling attention to the game excessively. As shown in FIG. 25 (h), the warning display is a message such as “Let's be careful not to get caught!” In the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27 for at least a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (a mode surrounded by a square frame). Is displayed until. The predetermined notification condition is a condition that is satisfied according to the progress of the game. The sub CPU 71 determines, for example, on the basis of a state command from the main control board 63, that the notification condition is satisfied when the state advantageous to the player such as AT or RBB ends, and displays a caution display on the liquid crystal display 27. . The caution display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 51.

  FIG. 26 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase in number reaches “2000” during AT after the ART is started. FIG. 26A is a display example immediately before the net increase in number reaches “2000”. The net addition number on the upper right of the display area is displayed as “1993”, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by the push order bell winning.

  FIG. 26B is a display example when the bell is won in the game shown in FIG. 26A and the net additional number reaches “2000”. When the net addition number reaches "2000", the execution flag of the OVER display (rainbow mode) of "2000" is set in SB18 of FIG. 19 and the rainbow flag is set in SB20. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the net additional number and the OVER display of "2000" are displayed in a rainbow manner. In the following, the gradations in the drawings indicate that they are displayed in a rainbow pattern.

  FIG. 26C is a display example when the next game (game) after the game in FIG. 26B is started. When a new game is started, the remaining AT game number is subtracted and displayed as "34G", and since the bet number is set to "3", the net additional number is subtracted and displayed as "1999". As shown in FIG. 26C, after the display of the net additional number is once displayed in the rainbow mode, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained even if the net additional number is less than “2000”.

  FIG. 26D is a display example when a medal is given after the game in FIG. 26C and the net additional number reaches “2000” again. In FIG. 26D, a message such as “bell GET!” (Hereinafter, also referred to as an acquisition message) is displayed without the OVER display. As described above, when the net increase number reaches “2000” for the first time, the OVER display number of the next stage is already set, so that the OVER display of “2000” is displayed again as shown in FIG. It can be prevented from being performed.

  FIG. 26E is a display example of an end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and AT ends. As the end screen, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed on the background as in the case of FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as "Result AT game number: 1075 TOTAL: 2145 sheets" is displayed as a game result together with the caution display. Is displayed in a rainbow manner (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

  FIG. 26 (e ') shows the end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and the AT ends when the net increase is less than "2000" in the game after the net increase reaches "2000". It is a display example. Even in this case, since the rainbow flag is set, the game result is displayed in the rainbow mode as shown in FIG. 26 (e ') (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

  FIG. 27 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase in number reaches “2000” during the bonus controlled by winning the RBB (RBB1 in FIG. 27) in AT after the ART is started. Is shown. FIG. 27A is a display example immediately before the net increase in number reaches “2000”. The net increase in number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1990". In addition, in FIG. 27A, an expected feeling effect (scroll display of a message such as “super chance!”) Is performed in the lower part of the display area so as to have an expected feeling about the bonus winning. The expectation effect can be executed with a predetermined probability even when the bonus is not won.

  FIG. 27B is a display example of the confirmation screen. The sub CPU 71 switches the background image to the background image for the confirmation screen when the display timing determined after the bonus winning is reached. As the background image for the confirmation screen, for example, a single character is displayed in the center of the screen, and "bonus confirmed!" And "Aim for 7! 777" (because RBB1 has been won in FIG. 27B). A message such as a red "7" is shown) is displayed. As indicated by SB04 and SB07 in FIG. 18, while the final screen is displayed, the net additional number display is not displayed, but since the net additional number calculation period is reached, the net additional number is continuously calculated.

  When the bonus is started by winning the winning RBB1, the background image for the bonus is switched. As the bonus background image, for example, a single character is displayed in the center of the screen, and the net increase in the number of coins and the number of remaining payouts until the bonus ends (for example, the number of remaining coins: 200) are displayed in the upper right of the display area. It FIG. 27C is an example of a display when a small winning combination is won for the first time after the start of the bonus, and the payout of medals occurs. When a bell win occurs during a bonus in which the prescribed number of bets is “2”, 12 medals are paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27C, a message such as "12 GET!" Is displayed in the center of the display area, the net additional number is displayed in addition (TOTAL: 1992), and the remaining payout number is displayed in subtraction. (Remaining number of sheets: 188). Note that FIG. 27C shows an example in which the remaining payout number is displayed in the RBB, but the present invention is not limited to this as described above, and may be, for example, the net increase number or the paid out number. .

  FIG. 27D is a display example when the net winning number reaches "2000" by winning the bell during the bonus. When the net additional number reaches "2000" during the bonus, the net additional number and the "2000" OVER display are displayed in a rainbow manner as shown in FIG. 27 (d).

  FIG. 27E is a display example of an end screen when the bonus ends due to the number of payouts exceeding 200. As the end screen at the end of the bonus that occurred during AT, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and is calculated during the net increase number calculation period. The net additional number (TOTAL: 2169) and the net additional number in bonus (during bonus: 170) are displayed in a rainbow manner. After that, the AT is restarted by displaying a message such as "bonus complete AT re-entry!" Informing the restart of the AT in a rainbow manner.

  FIG. 27F is a display example when the background image for bonus is switched to the background image for AT again. After switching to the AT background image, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the net additional number is displayed in a rainbow manner, and the number of remaining AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed is displayed. The number of remaining AT games displayed when the bonus won during AT ends and AT is restarted is not limited to the number of remaining AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed. It may be the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of remaining AT games. Specifically, for example, even if a bonus is won in a game in which the remaining AT game number is “340”, and the remaining AT game number on the display is subtracted until the confirmation screen is displayed, after the bonus ends. When the AT is restarted, the number of remaining AT games may be displayed from "339".

  After that, the OVER display and the end screen until the end of the advantageous period are both displayed in the rainbow mode. After the bonus ends, the initial RT is set even during AT and the preparation period is started. During the preparation period, the remaining AT game number is not subtracted, and the subtraction display is restarted after the advantageous RT is controlled.

  FIG. 28 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase in number reaches “2000” while the RBB confirmation screen is displayed during AT after the ART is started. FIG. 28A is a display example at the time of winning the RBB immediately before the net additional number reaches "2000". The net increase in number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1990". Further, in FIG. 28A, the anticipation effect is executed in the lower part of the display area.

  FIG. 28B is a display example when the display timing determined after the bonus winning is reached and the background image is switched to the confirmation screen. FIG. 28C is a display example when the bell is won and the net additional number reaches “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed. Even when the number of net additions reaches OVER display number such as “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed, it is determined as NO in SB16 of FIG. 19 and the processing of SB17 and thereafter is not performed. Therefore, the message "Bell GET!" Is displayed without the OVER display.

  FIG. 28D is a display example when the winning RBB is won and the bonus start is notified after the net addition number reaches “2000” during the confirmation screen display. While switching to the background image for bonus, a message such as "Start bonus!" Is displayed. It should be noted that the net number of prints in the upper right of the display area exceeds "2000", but since the rainbow flag has not been set yet, it is displayed in the normal mode.

  FIG. 28 (e) is a display example when the small winning combination is won for the first time during the bonus. The net additional number is "2017" because twelve medals have been paid out after setting the bet number "2" in the state of FIG. 28 (d). As a result, it is determined YES in SB16 of FIG. 19, the execution flag of OVER display of "2000" is set in SB18, and the rainbow flag is set in SB20. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), the net additional number and the OVER display of "2000" are displayed in a rainbow manner. In this way, when the number of OVER displays or “2000” is reached during the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the OVER display is executed at that time as well, without setting the rainbow flag, and the first time after the bonus is controlled. When the medals are paid out, the OVER display is executed, and the rainbow flag is set and the rainbow display is performed.

  FIG. 29 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net additional number is displayed in the normal mode after ART is started. 29 and 30 to be described later, on the right side of the example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 27, the values of the net increase number and the cumulative number counter when the display screen is displayed are shown. FIG. 29A is a display example immediately before the cumulative number reaches “2370”. The net addition number on the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1593" and the advantageous operation mode is notified by the push-order bell winning.

  FIG. 29B is a display example when the bell is won in the game shown in FIG. 29A and the cumulative number reaches “2370”. When the cumulative total reaches “2370” (in FIG. 29B, the case where it reaches “2372” is illustrated), the end telop corresponding to the cumulative total reaching in SB13 of FIG. The flag is set and the net additional number is set to non-display in SB14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, a message such as “Soon to reach the upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 sheets” is displayed as the ending telop, and the net added number is increased. Is hidden. Further, when the ending telop display is displayed or when the ending telop is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 29B, an acquisition message such as “Bell GET!” Accompanying the bell winning is not displayed. . It should be noted that an acquisition message such as "Bell GET!" Associated with the bell winning may be displayed at the timing when the end telop display is displayed or even when the end telop is displayed. In this case, the ending telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the acquisition message. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ending telop than the acquisition message.

  FIG. 29C is a display example when the next game (game) after the game in FIG. 29B is started. When a new game is started, the remaining AT game number is subtracted and displayed at "34G", and since the bet number is set to "3", the cumulative number is "2369", which is less than "2370". However, as shown in FIG. 29C, after the cumulative total reaches "2370", even if the cumulative total becomes less than "2370" in accordance with the progress of the game thereafter, the end telop is displayed and The net increase is not displayed.

  Further, during the display of the ending telop, YES is determined in SB12 of FIG. Therefore, for example, even when the number of net additions reaches the set number of OVER display, the OVER display is not performed. Further, even when the net added number reaches "2000", the process does not shift to SB20 in FIG. 19 and the rainbow flag is not set, so that the net added number is not displayed in the rainbow rainbow mode. Further, the end telop display is maintained even when the RBB is won and the confirmation screen is displayed during AT or the RBB is won and the RBB is controlled.

  FIG. 29D is a display example of an end screen when medals are awarded after the game in FIG. 29C and the total number reaches the upper limit of “2400” and AT ends. As the end screen, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background as in the case of FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as "Result AT game number: 815" is displayed as a game result together with the caution display. Afterwards, it shifts to the normal period. Thus, in the game result after the end telop is displayed, the net additional number is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical value exceeding the upper limit “2400” of the accumulated number (the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) from being displayed as the net additional number.

  Further, as indicated by SB46 in FIG. 23, when the advantageous period ends, the number-related effect data during the advantageous period is initialized. Therefore, after the advantageous period ends, it is possible to prevent the production from being executed based on the number-of-sheets-related production data during the advantageous period. For example, the effect data to be initialized includes the net additional number updated (specified) in FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. Therefore, during the advantageous period to be controlled next, for example, it is possible to prevent displaying the net additional number in consideration of the net additional number in the completed advantageous period, and as a result, even during the next advantageous period to be controlled. It is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit “2400” of the cumulative number from being displayed as the net additional number.

  On the other hand, even when the advantageous period ends, the number-unrelated effect data before the advantageous period is carried over thereafter as indicated by SB46 in FIG. As described above, the number-unrelated performance data before the advantageous period includes the number of games, the role history, the bonus winning probability, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of stories, the number of consecutive chan, the number of net additions in the RBB, etc. Be done. Regarding these effect data, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, the game is carried over until the game is exhausted 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, and the game is started after the advantageous period ends. When the AT is won by being controlled in the next advantageous period by the time of exhausting 100 times, the type and content of the effect to be executed can be determined based on the effect data in the previous advantageous period in the AT. The sub CPU 71 specifies that the AT is controlled again by 100 times when the effect data of the previous advantageous period remains when the AT is controlled, and indicates, for example, that the AT is continuous. Display the image to be notified.

  FIG. 29E is a display example in the AT when the AT is controlled by the time the game is exhausted 100 times after the advantageous period ends. As shown in FIG. 29E, a background image corresponding to the AT is displayed, the net added number is newly updated and displayed from "0", and an image of a star mark is displayed on the left side of the net added number display. . The star mark is an example of an effect that is controlled by the AT again and notifies that the player is in continuous churn by 100 times. Two star marks are displayed in the second row. This makes it possible to specify that the current AT is the second consecutive chunk. After that, each time the consecutive chan is overlapped, the number of consecutive chan in the effect data is updated and the number of star marks is increased by one and displayed.

  FIG. 29 (e ') is a display example during the controlled AT after the game has been exhausted 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is played 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, the number-unrelated effect data before the previous advantageous period is also initialized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (e '), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 29 (a) or the like is displayed, and images such as star marks are not displayed.

  FIG. 30 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net additional number is displayed in the rainbow mode after ART is started. During AT, an effect having a predetermined storyline is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Although this point is not described, the same applies to the display screens in other ATs. For example, the story starts from the effect corresponding to the first episode, and thereafter, every time the game is exhausted 100 times during AT, the effect is updated to the effect corresponding to the next number of stories. Therefore, when the number of AT games exceeds "1100", for example, the effect corresponding to the twelfth episode is started. FIG. 30A is a display example immediately before the cumulative total reaches “2370”. The net addition number on the upper right of the display area is displayed as "2193" in the rainbow mode, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by the push-order bell winning. In FIG. 30A, it is assumed that the number of AT games exceeds “1100”. Therefore, "12th episode" is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 27, indicating that the story effect corresponding to the 12th episode is being executed. Every time the story progresses, the story number of the story in the effect data is updated.

  FIG. 30 (b) is a display example when the total number reaches “2370” after winning the bell in the game shown in FIG. 30 (a). When the cumulative number reaches "2370" in the case where the number of net additions is displayed in a rainbow manner (in FIG. 30 (b), the case where it reaches "2372" is illustrated) is shown in FIG. As shown, in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, the ending ticker is displayed in a rainbow manner, and the net additional number is hidden. In addition, since the ending telop is displayed, the number of stories is also hidden.

  FIG. 30C is a display example when the next game is started. When a new game is started, the remaining AT game number is subtracted and displayed at "34G", and since the bet number is set to "3", the cumulative number is "2369", which is less than "2370". However, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), after the cumulative total reaches "2370", even if the cumulative total becomes less than "2370" in accordance with the progress of the game thereafter, the end telop is displayed and The net increase is not displayed.

  FIG. 30 (d) is a display example of the end screen when medals are awarded after the game in FIG. 30 (c) and the cumulative number reaches the upper limit of “2400” and AT ends. As the end screen, an image like the shutter of the camera is displayed in the background, while a message such as "Result AT game number: 1105" is displayed in the rainbow mode as a game result together with the caution display, and then in the normal period. Transition. In this way, the net additional number is not displayed even in the game result after the ending telop is displayed in the rainbow mode.

  FIG. 30 (e) is a display example in the AT when the AT is controlled by the time the game is exhausted 100 times after the advantageous period ends. In FIG. 30E, a case will be described in which an image corresponding to the number of talks of the effect executed during the previous advantageous period is displayed. As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed, and the net additional number is newly updated and displayed from "0", and the star mark image is displayed on the left side of the net additional number display. 29 (similar to FIG. 29), a story number image for identifying how many stories have been reached in the previous advantageous period, such as “12th story has arrived!”, Is displayed below the net increase display. As a result, it is possible to specify that the current AT is the second consecutive chunk and that the story has advanced to the twelfth episode in the previous advantageous period. The production during the current AT may start from the 12th or 13th episode, or may start from the 1st episode again.

  FIG. 30 (e ′) is a display example in the AT controlled after the game is exhausted 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is played 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, the number-unrelated effect data before the previous advantageous period is also initialized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (e '), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 30 (a) or the like is displayed, and images such as the star mark and the talk number image are not displayed.

  Next, the interlocking with mobile phones will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the portable interlocking setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the player menu state and the screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player. FIG. 31 (a) is a cell-phone interlocking start screen for starting cell-phone interlocking by inputting a password issued by the management server in the cell-phone interlocking setting screen. On the cell-phone interlock start screen, as shown in FIG. 31A, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, and a character string is displayed below. By operating the effect operation unit 81, the issued password is input and the determination icon is selected to start the cell-phone interlocking, and as shown in SB42 of FIG. Game history data for interlocking is accumulated.

  FIG. 31B shows a case where a two-dimensional code generated based on the game history data for cell-phone interlock is displayed by ending the cell-phone interlock by operating the effect operation unit 81 in the cell-interlock setting screen. Is a mobile-linked end screen. A two-dimensional code is displayed on the cell-phone interlock end screen as shown in FIG. As indicated by SB44 in FIG. 23, the displayed two-dimensional code is a code capable of specifying the game history data for mobile communication. The player can confirm the game history displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal based on the game history data for mobile communication by reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal. The communication terminal can also read the two-dimensional code to transmit the game history data for mobile interlocking to the management server and store the game history data as the game history of the player.

  FIG. 31C is a game history screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal by reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal owned by the player. By reading the two-dimensional code, the game history of this time accumulated during the current mobile interlocking operation and the total game history of the game history accumulated in the past are displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal. The game history data for cell-phone linkage is, for example, not only the game history data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period controlled during cell-phone linkage, but also the payout during the advantageous period. It also includes game history data that is directly related to the number of medals played. Therefore, on the game history screen, as shown in FIG. 31C, a game history (for example, the number of games, the number of ATs, the AT, etc.) that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous period. In addition to the number of games, the number of stories, etc.), it is possible to display a game history (AT net increase number), etc., which is directly related to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous period.

(About notice)
Next, the caution display shown in FIG. 25 and the like will be described in detail. The sub CPU 71 outputs to the liquid crystal display 27 information capable of specifying the image to be displayed according to the progress of the game and the layer / display position for each image, and the layer on which the image is drawn is assigned according to the priority of the layer. The superimposed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment defines the relationship (layer, display position, etc.) with other images (effects) displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in order to fully exercise the function of calling attention by the caution display. There is.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the priority of the area used for display and the layer of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 for each of the caution display and the other image display. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing areas 1 to 5 in which the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is divided into five areas. FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the priorities of regions and layers used for display for each type of image.

  For the caution display, the area 2 corresponding to the center of the display area shown in FIG. 32A is used, and the highest priority “1” is set for the layer. Therefore, even if another image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, it is possible to always display the caution display image so that the player can visually recognize it.

  The error notification is to notify the type of error when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred based on the error command. For the error notification, the areas 1 and 3 corresponding to the upper and lower portions of the display area are used, and "2" is set as the priority of the layer.

  In the navigation effect, the sub CPU 71 notifies the advantageous operation mode based on the advantageous operation mode command from the main CPU 61. For the navigation effect, the area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used and "3" is set as the priority of the layer.

  The history display is for displaying a net additional number in the advantageous state and the number of games in the advantageous state (for example, the number of AT games) when the advantageous state for the player such as AT or RBB ends. is there. For the history display, the area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used, and “4” is set as the priority of the layer.

  The suggestion display indicates the setting value set in the slot machine 1. In the suggestion display, for example, suggestion A suggesting that the set value set is highly likely to be an even number, suggestion B confirming that the set value set is 5 or more, It includes a suggestion C and the like for definitively informing that the set value being set is 6. When the set value is set, the main CPU 61 outputs a command capable of specifying the set value to the sub CPU 71. The sub CPU 71 specifies a set value based on the command, and determines whether or not to perform suggestion display, the type of suggestion display, and the like by random number lottery based on the set value (hereinafter, also referred to as suggestion display lottery). For the suggestion display, one of the areas 4 and 5 corresponding to the left and right of the display area is used, and "5" is set as the priority of the layer.

  The dialogue display is an effect that can be developed in three stages over a plurality of games. In the first stage of the dialogue display, explanations and explanations of effects and the like that occur in the slot machine 1 are displayed. The display of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display is performed when the next game is started after the game in which the display of the first stage is performed is completed. The display in the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display suggests the set value set in the slot machine 1, similarly to the suggestion display. The second stage dialogue display suggests that the set value being set may be 5 or more. The dialogue display in the third stage suggests that the set value that has been set may be 6. Therefore, from the first stage presentation of the dialogue display, it is only a material for deepening the understanding of the presentation and the like. However, from the presentation of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display, the player can predict the set value that has been set.

  The sub CPU 71 specifies the set value based on a command that can specify the set value, and based on the set value, whether or not to execute the serif display, the type of the serif display (how many stages to develop, and the content of the serif, etc.). ) Is determined by a random number lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a dialogue display lottery). The dialogue display uses different regions depending on the stage. Area 1 corresponding to the upper part of the display area is used for the image in the first stage of the serif display. An area 2 corresponding to the central portion of the display area is used for the second stage image of the serif display. An area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used for the image in the third stage of the dialogue display. In the dialog display, "6" is set as the layer priority regardless of the stage of the image.

  The background displays an image according to the state controlled in the slot machine 1 (general game state, RBB, CZ, AT, error, etc.). The sub CPU 71 displays a background image according to the state specified by the state command or the like. As the background, the entire display area is used, and the lowest layer priority is set to "7". Therefore, even if the background image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 27, other images can be preferentially displayed by being superimposed on the background image. As described above, the chance button effect image may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. It may be set.

  Here, the priority and the like regarding the display of the ending telop will be described. The display of the ending telop is displayed at least in the history display, the suggestion display, the serif display, and the layer having a higher priority than the background. In addition, the display of the ending telop may be displayed in the same layer as any of the caution display, the error notification, and the navigation effect, or may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than any one. It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29 and the like, the ending telop is displayed in the area 2 of FIG. 32A, and thus, for example, an example in which the ending telop is not overlapped with the area 3 for displaying the navigation effect is shown. However, the ending telop area and the navigation effect area may partially overlap each other. Even in this case, it is sufficient that both the display of the ending telop and the display of the navigation effect are displayed so that the player can recognize or specify them.

  Regarding the relationship between the ending telop and the player menu screen in accordance with the operation on the effect operation unit 81, the player menu screen can be displayed even when the ending telop is displayed. The player menu screen may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the ending telop. Thus, while preventing the visibility of menu items and the like on the player menu screen from being deteriorated by the ending telop, the ending telop can be displayed to notify that the advantageous period is about to end.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are timing charts for explaining an example of the effect regarding the caution display. 33 and 34, a case will be described in which the notification condition for the caution display is satisfied because the AT ends as an advantageous state. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 show a plurality of effect examples, but from the top, the type of game state, the number of games, the rotation state of the reels 11L to 11R, and among the effects, background, identification, suggestion, and attention. Shows the execution status. A background image corresponds to the background. Suggestion display corresponds to suggestion. An attention display corresponds to an attention. Other than these, error notification, navigation effect, history display, dialogue display (first stage), etc. correspond to the specification. The suggestion is an image displayed according to the progress of the game. The identification is an image that is displayed when the specific condition regarding the game is established, which is a condition that can be established according to the progress of the game. 33 to 42 referred to in the description of the caution display, an example in which the condition for displaying the end telop is not satisfied will be described. However, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" or the advantageous period counter is displayed. When the value of is less than or equal to 5, the ending telop display is performed as described with reference to the drawings up to FIG. When the caution display described in FIGS. 33 to 42 is performed during the end telop display, the end telop display is terminated at the timing when the caution display is performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the final game in the advantageous state is started, an ending effect for ending the advantageous state is performed in the final game. During the ending effect for advantageous state ending, the caution display and the history display are performed, and the navigation effect and the suggestion display are performed according to the winning situation and the result of the suggestion display lottery. Also, after the next game after the ending effect is finished, the dialogue display is performed according to the result of the dialogue display lottery. First, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of effects (hereinafter, also referred to as an attention completion pattern) in which the caution display is completed during the ending effect will be described.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 1 in which history display and dialogue display are performed as the specific display. Timing 1 indicates the timing when the reel rotation is started and one game (final game) is started when the value of the remaining AT game number counter is “1”. Until the final game is started, a background image for AT (for example, a lightning bolt image, a story image including a narrative element, etc.) is displayed as a background image, whereas when the final game is started, It is switched to the ending background for AT termination. As the ending background for AT termination, for example, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed (described later with reference to FIG. 35A, etc.).

  In the final game in which the number of games is “N + 1” in FIG. 33A, for example, because the push order bell is not won, the navigation effect is not performed, and the suggestion display is selected. Is also not done. Timing 2 is the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the final game was started, and the timing at which the caution display is started.

  The caution display is displayed in the area 2, which has the highest priority. The caution display is displayed until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the display was started. The sub CPU 71 increments the value of the caution display counter capable of specifying the time during which the caution display is displayed by 1 at predetermined intervals, and when the value of the caution display counter reaches a value corresponding to "3 seconds". The warning display ends. The caution display counter is added and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 75.

  Timing 3 indicates the timing when the stop games 21L to 21R are each operated to stop the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R and the final game ends. When the final game is over, a history is displayed to notify the net number of medals and the number of AT games in the advantageous state of ending. The history display is displayed in the area 3 and the layer having the priority “4”. Therefore, the caution display is not obstructed by the history display.

  Timing 4 indicates the timing at which the sub CPU 71 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the caution display based on the caution display counter and ends the caution display. The caution display can be continued in the area 2 while maintaining the display mode at the beginning of the display until a predetermined time elapses, and is not disturbed by other images (history display, background, etc.). For this reason, the function of calling attention by the caution display can be sufficiently exerted.

  Timing 5 indicates the timing at which the game was started in the normal period after the end of AT. When the game is started in the normal period, the background is switched to the normal background image. Also, in the first game in the normal period after the end of AT, the dialogue display is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide an enjoyment such as guessing the set value by developing the dialogue display to the second stage, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  FIG. 33B is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 2 in which the navigation effect is performed as the specific display by winning the push order bell or the like in the final game. When the final game is started, as shown at the timing 1, the background for AT is switched to the ending background for ending AT and the navigation effect is displayed. Even when the navigation effect is displayed, the caution display is performed at the timing 2 as in the effect example 1 of FIG. The navigation effect is displayed in the area 3 and the layer having the priority “3”. Therefore, the caution display is not obstructed by the navigation effect. In addition, since the timing 2 and subsequent steps are the same as those in the effect example 1 of FIG. 33A, description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 33C is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 3 in which a suggestion display is performed in the final game. Timing 2 indicates the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the final game, as in FIG. 33A. The suggestion display starts at timing 2. When the suggestion display is made, the caution display is not made at the timing 2. Therefore, in the final game, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the suggestion display or the caution display is performed at the timing 2.

  Timing 2'indicates the timing at which the suggestion display ends. When the suggestion display ends, the caution display starts. The suggestion display is a display that suggests the set value (advantage) of the slot machine 1, and therefore tends to concentrate the player's line of sight. For this reason, in the slot machine 1, the caution display is not performed in parallel with the suggestion display, and the caution display is performed after the suggestion display is completed. In addition, since the caution display is displayed in the area 2 different from the areas 4 and 5 in which the suggestion display was performed, the player can easily notice that the display content is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention display from being overlooked, and it is possible to fully exercise the function of calling attention by focusing attention on the attention display.

  FIG. 33 (d) is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 4 in which the navigation effect and the suggestion display are performed in the final game. In the description of FIG. 33D, FIG. 35 will be referred to. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the display contents of effect example 4 on the liquid crystal display 27.

  At timing 1 when the final game starts, the ending background is switched and the navigation effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 35A, an ending background image for AT termination such as a shutter of a camera is displayed on the entire display area, and a navigation effect image is displayed in area 3.

  At timing 2, a suggestion display is made. In the example of FIG. 35B, the image of the character A is displayed in the area 5 as a suggestion display. The suggestion display that displays the character A is an example of suggestion A that suggests that the set value that is set is likely to be an even number (2, 6), for example. As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the slot machine 1 to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with an interesting point of guessing.

  At the timing 2 ', the suggestion display is terminated and the caution display is displayed. As shown in FIG. 35C, the suggestion display in the area 5 ends, and the caution display is displayed in the area 2. At the timing 3, the final game ends and the history is displayed. As shown in FIG. 35D, a display such as “TOTAL: 540 sheets” is displayed as the history display in the area 3, and the caution display in the area 2 is continuously displayed without being obstructed by the history display.

  At timing 5, the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT, the background is switched to the normal background, and the dialogue display is performed. As a background image for normal use, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), an image of the sun is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and although not shown in FIG. 35 (e), a corresponding image is displayed on the entire display area. Is displayed. Further, in the first stage of the dialogue display, a dialogue such as “character A is not so good” is displayed as a message explaining the suggestion display shown in FIG. 35 (b). This allows the player to easily understand the content of the suggestion display.

  If the second and subsequent steps are not performed as the dialogue display, the dialogue display is ended when the next game is started. On the other hand, when performing the second and subsequent stages as the dialogue display, a dialogue such as "I hope!" Is displayed in the area 2 as shown in FIG. 35 (f) when the next game is started. The possibility that the set value is set to 4 or more and the possibility that the set value is set to 6 differ depending on the contents of the dialogue after the second stage. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a material that suggests the set value and make the material predict so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34A and 34B, an example of an effect in which the caution display is not completed during the ending effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a caution incomplete pattern) will be described. FIG. 34 (a) is a timing chart for explaining the effect example 5 in the case where the suggestion display is not performed during the ending effect, and FIG. 34 (b) is the timing chart in the case where the suggestion display is performed during the ending effect. It is a timing chart for explaining example 6 of production.

  The caution display is continuously displayed until a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started. Therefore, when an operation (betting number setting, operation of the start switch 19) for ending the final game and starting the next game is performed until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the caution display, the ending effect Irrespective of whether or not a suggestion display is made therein, as shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the caution display is not completed during the ending effect.

  Timing 6 indicates the timing at which the game was started in the normal period after the end of AT. Similar to FIG. 33, at timing 6, the background is switched to the normal background image. Also, in the first game in the normal period after the end of AT, the dialogue display is performed. Further, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, since the predetermined time has not elapsed since the warning display was started at the timing 6, the warning display is continuously performed.

  Here, the display content of the effect example 6 on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described with reference to FIGS. At timing 6, the dialogue display is performed and the caution display is continuously performed. The first stage of the dialogue display is displayed in the area 1 and the layer having the priority "6", while the caution display is displayed in the area 2 and the layer "1" having the highest priority. To be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (g), it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the dialogue display.

  Timing 7 indicates the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the caution display was started and the caution display was ended. FIG. 35 (h) shows the display contents when the second and subsequent stages are performed as the dialogue display when the next game is started. The warning display has already ended at timing 7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), the second stage dialogue can be displayed in the area 2 without affecting the caution display.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34 (c), the effect when the caution display is not completed during the ending effect and an error occurs during the operation for the first game start in the normal period after the end of AT 9 is a timing chart for explaining Example 7. FIG. 34C illustrates a case where a selector error has occurred. Timing 8 indicates a timing at which a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 for starting the first game in the normal period, but the medal is stuck in the selector and a selector error occurs. That is, the timing 8 is the timing at which the sub CPU 71 specifies that the selector error has occurred based on the error command output from the main CPU 61. When it is specified that an error has occurred, the background for the error is switched to and an error message corresponding to the type of error is displayed. At timing 8, the error notification is given as a specific display, and since the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the caution display, the caution display is continued.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35 (i), the display content of the effect example 7 on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. At timing 8, a character image with a troubled expression is displayed in the upper right of the screen as a background image for error, and a corresponding image is displayed on the entire display area, which is not shown in FIG. 35 (i).

  Further, as an error notification, a message image such as “selector error !!” in area 1 and “call a clerk!” In area 3 is displayed in the layer of priority “2”. On the other hand, the caution display is continuously displayed in the area 2 having the highest priority. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (i), it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by an error notification or the like. The caution display ends at timing 9 when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 34 (c) and FIG. 35 (i), the example in which the caution display is continuously performed during the error notification has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this during the error notification, and for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the warning display is temporarily stopped during the error notification (timing 8 ′ to 10 ′), and the caution is displayed after the error notification ends. The display may be restarted.

  The warning display to be restarted may be displayed with the remaining time up to a predetermined time when it is once stopped. Specifically, the value of the caution display counter at the time of the temporary stop may be maintained, updated from the value after the restart, and the caution display may be ended when the value corresponding to the predetermined time is reached. Further, when the caution display is restarted, the caution display may be performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the restart time. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 is provided with determination information for determining whether or not the caution display has been displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds), and has been displayed for a predetermined time based on the determination information after completion of error notification. If it is, the warning display may not be performed, and if the predetermined time has not been displayed based on the determination information, the warning display may be restarted. Further, when the error notification is made, the caution display may be ended and the caution display may not be made even after the error notification is finished.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the caution display is performed when the AT ends in the advantageous state has been specifically described, but the slot machine 1 also warns when the bonus controlled by the RBB winning ends. Display. The slot machine 1 may perform the caution display at any other timing as long as the caution display is performed at least when an advantageous state such as AT or bonus ends.

(Regarding the processing related to additional effects)
Next, the process related to the additional effect will be described in detail. In the production control process, in the processes in AT07, SA08, SA09, etc. in the AT shown in FIG. 9, based on the command output for each game in the AT from the main CPU 61 side, it is related to the addition in the production in AT. Control production. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining an example of the addition-related effect control processing for controlling the effect related to the addition in the effect control processing.

  In SB50, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command that are output (SA07, SA08, SA09 in FIG. 9) for each game in AT are received, and the processing in SB51 and subsequent steps is performed. To execute. In SB51, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. When it is determined in SB51 that the ending telop flag has been set, the ending telop flag has already been set, so the addition-related production control process is performed without determining the upper limit number of games remaining up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods. finish. On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB51 that the ending telop flag is set, it is determined in SB52 whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games until the upper limit number of advantageous periods is five or less. The remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is specified based on the remaining upper limit game number command from the main CPU 61. If it is determined in SB52 that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, the process proceeds to SB53.

  At SB53, an end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the ending telop when it is determined that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit number of the advantageous period is 5 or less, a message such as “Soon to reach the upper limit of the advantageous period of 1500G” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. To do. As a result, the ending telop is displayed until the advantageous period ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB52 that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, the process proceeds to SB54. In SB54, it is determined whether or not the number of additional games added in the current game specified by the additional game number command is a value larger than 0. If it is not determined in SB54 that the number of games to be added this time is greater than 0, the addition-related effect control process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined at SB54 that the number of games added this time is greater than 0, it is determined at SB55 whether or not the remaining AT game number is equal to or more than the remaining upper limit game number. The remaining AT game number is specified from the remaining AT game number command received in SB50. Further, the remaining upper limit game number is specified from the remaining upper limit game number command received in SB50.

  When it is not determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games (the number of games after the number of additional games is added) is equal to or more than the upper limit number of remaining games, that is, the remaining upper limit number of games is still consumed even if the remaining number of AT games is consumed. In the situation that does not reach, the addition effect for notifying the number of addition games specified from the addition game number command in SB56 is set. As a result, the addition effect is executed. As the addition effect, for example, when the number of addition games is “100”, a message such as “100 games GET!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, and a sound effect such as “Dawn!” Is output to the speakers 31L and 31R. Output from.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games is equal to or more than the upper limit number of remaining games, that is, in the situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, the special background in SB57 is set. Is set and it is determined whether or not the special background is being executed. When it is determined in SB57 that the special background has been set and the special background is being executed, the addition-related effect control process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB57 that the special background has been set and the special background is being executed, the special background is set in SB58 and the addition-related effect control process ends. As a result, the special background is predominantly executed only in a situation where the number of AT games is increased and it is determined that the advantageous period can be continued up to the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous period. As the special background, for example, a special background screen having a storyline is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 and the corresponding music / sound effect is output from the speakers 31L and 31R until the remaining upper limit number of games. As a result, the player can have a sense of superiority in completing the advantageous period. The special background will be described later with reference to FIG. Even when the special background is set, when the cumulative number reaches “2370” or when the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding ending telop is displayed. Further, even when the condition for executing the additional effect or the condition for setting the special background is satisfied during the end telop display, the execution of the additional effect and the switching to the special background are restricted and the end telop display is continued. And Further, when the special background is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing of executing the chance button effect, and the special background is set in the game in which the opportunity button effect is executed. If there is a possibility (when an addition occurs and the value obtained by adding the number of additional games to the number of remaining AT games is equal to or more than the upper limit number of remaining games), do not execute the chance button effect. You may

  Next, an example of controlling a predetermined effect including an additional effect and a special background depending on whether or not the upper limit number of remaining games is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. FIG. 37 (a) shows an example in which the upper limit number of remaining games is not reached even if the remaining number of AT games is consumed, and FIG. An example is shown in which the upper limit is reached when the upper limit number of games is reached. 37A and 37B are, respectively, from the top, the rotation status of the reels 11L to 11R, the number of remaining AT games, the number of remaining upper limit games, the presence or absence of additional lottery, the presence or absence of additional production, and special Indicates whether or not the background is executed.

  FIG. 37A shows a case where the additional lottery condition is satisfied in the game A shown in the reel column. The number of remaining AT games when the game A is started is “431”, and the upper limit number of remaining games is “497”. In this case, when "50" is determined as the additional game number by the additional lottery, the remaining AT game number after the additional game becomes "481", which means that the upper limit is not reached yet and the remaining upper limit game number is not yet determined. At SB56 of 36, the addition effect for notifying the number of addition games "50" is executed.

  FIG. 37B shows a case where the additional lottery condition is satisfied in the game B shown in the reel column. The number of remaining AT games when the game B is started is “468”, and the number of remaining upper limit games is “497”. In this case, when "50" is determined as the additional game number by the additional lottery, the remaining AT game number after the additional game becomes "518" and the upper limit game number is reached. If the determination at SB55 of 36 is YES, execution of the additional effect is restricted (see the additional effect column in FIG. 37 (b)). When the upper limit is confirmed, the special background is set by SB58 in FIG. 36, so that the special background can be executed (see the special background column in FIG. 37 (b)). Even when the special background is being executed, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" or when the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding ending telop is preferentially displayed.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the background screen in AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. FIG. 38A is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the background screen in AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. In FIG. 38A, the background, the number of remaining games, and the execution status of the navigation effect among the effects to be executed on the type of game state, the number of games, and the liquid crystal display 27 are shown from the top, and the game progress is added to the bottom. Indicates the presence or absence of. Further, FIG. 38 (a) shows (b) as the timing during the N + 4 game and (c) as the timing at which the N + 5 game is started. 38 (b) and (c) show background examples in the AT corresponding to the timings (b) and (c) shown in FIG. 38 (a), respectively.

  During AT (ART) in the advantageous period, as shown in the background column of FIG. 38 (a), either a normal effect or a special background is executed as the background in AT. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), it is assumed that the number of AT games is increased in the N + 4 game and it is determined that the AT is continued until the upper limit number of the advantageous period. Therefore, in FIG. 38A, the background of the normal effect is displayed up to N + 4, and the special background is displayed after N + 5. FIG. 38B shows an example of a background display of a normal effect, and FIG. 38C shows an example of a background display of a special background.

  In the background of the normal effect, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), for example, two characters are displayed at the center of the screen, and the remaining AT game number (the remaining AT game number is 350 In the case of, the LAST: 350G) is displayed, the total number of games played in the AT (TOTAL: 535G) is displayed, and the net increase in the AT (GET: 1105) is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The total number of games is the total number of games played during AT. On the other hand, the number of games played during the advantageous period includes all the games played during the advantageous period regardless of the state such as CZ or bonus not only during AT. Therefore, the total number of games does not always match the number of games played in the advantageous period. In addition, in the normal effect, the remaining upper limit number of games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is not displayed as the remaining number of games.

  On the other hand, in the special background, an effect having a special storyline is started after, for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 38 (c). In the special background, the number of remaining games at the upper left of the display area is switched from the remaining AT game number to the remaining upper limit game number. When the remaining upper limit number of games is 440, for example, "until ending: 440G" is displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (c). Even in the special background, the net increase in number is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the total number of games is not displayed in the special background, but may be continuously displayed even after the start of the special background.

  In addition, in the center of the upper part of the display area, a message such as "completion of completion! ~ Congratulation ~" is displayed to notify that the AT has been continuously confirmed up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the background of the strip-shaped area above the display area in which various information is displayed is displayed in a special mode (for example, a rainbow mode). The gradation in the drawing indicates that it is displayed in a special manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize and notify that it is determined that the AT will be continued up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of superiority.

<Regarding administrator menu status and player menu status>
In the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for controlling to the administrator menu state during the setting change process and displaying an administrator menu screen for displaying and setting the management items for the administrator. Further, in the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for controlling a player menu state during a game standby state and displaying a player menu screen for displaying / setting game items for the player. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display triggers, termination triggers, and control contents when an error occurs during menu display on the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen, respectively.

  The sub CPU 71 displays the administrator menu screen by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the setting change process. In addition, the sub CPU 71 determines whether an operation to the start switch 19 is detected (setting is confirmed) in the setting change process and the change process start switch 56 is OFF (key off) (that is, the setting change end command is received), and the effect operation unit. The display of the administrator menu screen is ended when a predetermined specific time elapses without operating 81 or when the setting of any management item is completed in the administrator menu state. The sub CPU 71 determines that the setting change process is in progress from the time the setting change start command is received until the setting change end command is received. During this period, the sub CPU 71 displays the administrator menu screen by executing a sub side setting change state process described later with reference to FIG. 47.

  The sub CPU 71 executes an error determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side, but also in the administrator menu state. On the other hand, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process on the main CPU 61 side while the setting change process is being executed. Therefore, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 71 displays an error (sub system) on the sub CPU 71 side rather than the administrator menu screen. Error) Notification is given priority. Here, the sub system error refers to a communication error between the main control board and the sub control board, a communication error between the sub CPU and the liquid crystal display, or the like.

  The sub CPU 71 displays the player menu screen by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the game standby. In addition, the sub CPU 71 operates the determination switch 81a in a state where the "end" item for ending the display of the player menu screen is selected, or the predetermined operation is performed without operating the effect operation unit 81. The display of the player menu screen is ended due to the passage of time or the completion of the setting of the mobile link service (including a quick start described later) on the player menu screen. The sub CPU 71 determines, for example, that the game is on standby from the time the game result command is received until the time the reel rotation start command is received. During this period, the sub CPU 71 displays a player menu screen by executing a sub game standby process described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 71 executes an error judgment process for judging whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side, but also in the player menu state. Further, the main CPU 61 executes error determination processing on the main CPU 61 side even during the game standby. Therefore, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in the error determination processing on each of the main CPU 61 side and the sub CPU 71 side, the sub CPU 71 gives priority to the error notification rather than the player menu screen.

  Both the display of the administrator menu screen and the display of the player menu screen end when a predetermined time elapses without operating the effect operation unit 81. The specific time set as the time for ending the administrator menu screen is set shorter than the predetermined time set as the time for ending the player menu screen. For example, the specific time is set to 30 seconds, while the predetermined time is set to 3 minutes. Therefore, when the player is left without operating the menu screen, the display of the administrator menu screen can be ended at a timing earlier than the timing of ending the display of the player menu screen. As a result, the slot machine 1 can reduce the possibility that the player will see the administrator menu screen. Hereinafter, the player menu screen will be specifically described.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the player menu screen in the player menu state. During the game standby, the sub CPU 71 first displays the game screen (including the screen displayed while the reel is rotating) on the liquid crystal display 27, and transitions to the demo screen when a predetermined time has elapsed. In this way, when the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is operated while the game screen or the demo screen in the game standby mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the sub CPU 71 controls the player menu state. Then, a menu top screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a player menu screen. On the menu top screen, "quick start" items, "mobile interlocking service" items, "role composition" items, "production customization" items, and "end" items, which are examples of game items, are displayed.

  The “quick start” item is an item for starting a quick start. A quick start is a game that can output the information that can identify the game history such as the number of games accumulated since the quick start was selected, the number of small wins and the number of bonus wins, etc. at the end of the game without entering a password. Mode. The player can update the game history of the player managed in the server by outputting the information output at the end of the game to a predetermined server using a mobile terminal or the like.

  The "mobile phone linked service" item is an item for starting the mobile phone linked service. The mobile link service allows a player to play a game while reflecting the game history of the player by inputting a password issued by a predetermined server, and update the game history of the player on the server. This is a possible game mode. At the end of the game, similarly to the quick start, it is possible to output the information that can identify the accumulated game history and update the game history of the player managed in the server.

  The “combination configuration” item is information about a combination defined in the slot machine 1 (for example, combination name, symbol combination, number of payouts, etc. shown in FIG. 6) and transition of game state (for example, in FIG. 8 or AT). This is an item for displaying (transition etc.). The “effect customization” item is an item for selecting and setting the type of effect or the like to be executed according to the background or the progress of the game according to the player's preference. The “end” item is an item for ending the player menu screen and transitioning to the demo screen.

  On the menu top screen, one of the displayed items is selected by operating the up, down, left, and right switches of the effect operation unit 81, and the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. To decide. The sub CPU 71 executes a process corresponding to the decided item. A cursor is displayed for the game item selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches on the player menu screen, and the game item is highlighted (see FIG. 40, FIG. 41 (a), etc.).

  When the “quick start” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 causes the liquid crystal display 27 to display a start screen to start the quick start, and then transitions to the demo screen. When the start screen is displayed, the CPU 71 executes processing for starting a quick start (start of accumulation of game history in the RAM 75, etc.).

  When the “mobile interlocking service” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 causes the liquid crystal display 27 to display the mobile interlocking service start screen, and then transitions to the demo screen. As a start screen of the mobile link service, first, a password input screen is displayed, and a screen for starting the mobile link service is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 when the entered password is a proper password. Further, the CPU 71 executes processing for starting the mobile link service (game history reflection, start of game history accumulation in the RAM 75, etc.).

  When the “combination composition” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays information about combinations defined in the slot machine 1 as a second layer screen (for example, combination name, symbol combination, payout number, etc.). The information shown in FIG. 6) and the transition of the game state (for example, transition of FIG. 8 and AT) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the "combination component" item is selected and determined, first, a combination component screen showing information about the combination defined in the slot machine 1 is displayed, and "Next" item and "Return to menu top" item are displayed. indicate. When the "next" item is selected and determined, a game flow screen showing information about the transition of the game state (for example, transition of FIG. 8 or AT) is displayed, and the "return" item and "return to menu top" are displayed. Show items and. When the "Return" item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the winning combination screen, and when the "Return to menu top" item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the menu top screen. The "Game Flow screen" has been described as an example included in the "composition configuration" item, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a "Game Flow" item can be selected separately from the "composition configuration" item on the menu top screen. Alternatively, it may be a screen displayed when the "game flow" item is selected and determined.

  When the “production customization” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays the production customization screen on the liquid crystal display 27 as a second hierarchy screen. In the production customization screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), as a second-level screen, "Navivoice" item, "Costume" item, "Wallpaper" item, "Restore default" item, and "Return to menu top" The item is displayed.

  The “navigation voice” item is an item for selecting the type of character (the type of voice to be output) when performing an effect that produces a sound (for example, a navigation effect). When the "Navi Voice" item is selected and determined on the production customization screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), as a screen of the third layer, it is possible to select any one of a plurality of types of characters AE. The item is displayed. As a result, one of the characters displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the voice of the character is output from the speakers 31L and 31R. When the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is decided, the setting information for specifying the character is stored in the RAM 75, and the display of the "character" item is terminated. Return to the second level screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "Navi voice is set to character ○○", the player can be notified of the setting and the player can recognize that the setting has been made. You can Then, during the game, the navigation effect is executed using the voice data of the set character. The "character?" Item of the "character" items is a character that cannot be selected at present, and can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating the game history. Also, during production customization, not only when the "character" item is displayed, but when the player determines an item on the screen of the third layer, the screen of the second layer is displayed instead of the screen of the first layer. Return to. That is, the production customization is continued. As a result, the player can continue to set other items, which improves convenience.

  The “costume” item is an item for selecting the type of costume of the character. When the "costume" item is selected and determined on the production customizing screen, the "costume" item capable of selecting any of the plurality of types of costumes A to E is displayed as the third layer screen. As a result, one of the costumes displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the image of the costume may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is decided, the setting information for specifying the costume is stored in the RAM 75, and the "Costume" item of the liquid crystal display 27 is set. The display is ended and the screen returns to the second level screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "I have set in costume XX", it is possible to inform the player of the setting and the player can recognize that it has been set. . Then, during the game, the character is displayed in the costume of the set costume. Among the “costume” items, the “costume?” Item is a costume that cannot be selected at present, and is a costume that can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating the game history.

  As the screen when the "production customization" item is selected and determined, in FIG. 41, when the item is selected and determined in the image of the second layer (FIG. 41 (a)), the image is switched to the image of the third layer. (FIG. 41 (b)) An example has been described in which, when an item is selected and determined in the image of the third layer, the image of the second layer is displayed again (FIG. 41 (a)). However, the screen when the item is selected and determined is not limited to this, and when the item is selected and determined in the image of the second layer, the image of the third layer is displayed while displaying the image of the second layer. May be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the "Navivoice" item is selected and determined, the "character" item capable of selecting any of a plurality of types of characters is displayed on the liquid crystal as the third layer screen. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the container 27. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), when the "costume" item is selected and determined, the "costume" item capable of selecting any of a plurality of types of costumes is displayed on the liquid crystal as the third layer screen. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the container 27. In this case, when the selected item is selected by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81, the RAM 75 stores the setting information for specifying the character or the costume, and the right side of the liquid crystal display 27. The display of the "character" item or the "costume" item in the display area may be terminated and the screen of the second layer may be returned to.

  The “wallpaper” item is an item for selecting the type of image (frame image or the like) that is fixed to some extent in the background displayed during the game. When the “wallpaper” item is selected and determined on the effect customizing screen, the “wallpaper type” item capable of selecting any of a plurality of types of wallpapers is displayed as the third layer screen. As a result, any type of wallpaper displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the image image of the wallpaper may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is decided, the setting information for specifying the type of the wallpaper is stored in the RAM 75, and the "wallpaper type" of the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. The display of the item is ended and the screen returns to the second level screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "Wallpaper XX has been set", the player can be notified of the setting and the player can recognize that the setting has been made. . Then, during the game, the background is displayed by the set wallpaper.

  The item “return to default” is an item for returning the navigation voice, costume, wallpaper, etc. set in the production customization to the default state. When the "Restore to default" item is selected and determined on the production customization screen, after initializing the setting information stored in the RAM 75 and displaying a message such as "Clearing setting information" on the production customization screen , The screen returns to the second layer screen again.

  The “return to menu top” item is an item for returning to the menu top screen. When the "return to menu top" item is selected and determined on the production customization screen, the production customization screen is terminated and the menu top screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 40, as the player menu screen, a menu top screen of the first layer, various display screens and effect customization screens of the second layer, and an effect customization screen of the third layer are illustrated. Of these, no matter which player menu screen is displayed, when the predetermined time elapses without the effect operation unit 81 being operated, a transition is made to the demo screen. The player menu screen is a screen for displaying or setting game items for the player. Therefore, the predetermined time is set longer than the specific time set for the administrator menu screen. As a result, it is possible to set the game item with a comparatively margin while checking the game items at the player's pace.

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 operates the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 or inserts a medal into the medal slot 25, regardless of which player menu screen is displayed in the player menu state. When the bet number is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the player menu screen is ended and the game screen is displayed. Thereby, when the player confirms the intention to start the game, the game can be started immediately.

<About power-on processing>
When the power switch 50 is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main CPU 61 performs the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the power-on process, first, in S01, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is ON. The power interruption signal is a signal that remains ON until the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. If it is determined in S01 that the power failure signal is ON, the process stands by. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the power interruption signal is ON, the access to the RAM 65 is permitted in S02.

  In S03, a backup failure determination process is performed on the RAM 65. In the backup failure determination process, for example, a checksum determination is performed to determine backup failure using the chuck sum value, an abnormal power failure determination is performed to determine abnormal power failure based on the value of the power failure flag, and the range of the stack pointer at power failure The stack pointer judgment, the setting value judgment whether the setting value is within the predetermined range (1 to 6), the internal winning information upper rank judgment whether the internal winning information upper rank is within the predetermined range, etc. When it is determined that the RAM 65 is abnormal, it is determined that the backup state of the RAM 65 is defective, and the RAM error flag is set as error data. The error data is data for specifying the presence or absence of an error that has occurred at various timings.

  In S04, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is in the ON state. When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3, the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is turned on. When it is not determined that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, the front door 5 is in a state of being opened with respect to the housing 3. Therefore, in S05, whether the change processing start switch 56 is operated to be in the ON state. It is determined whether or not. When it is determined that the change process start switch 56 is in the ON state, the setting change process is performed in S10. The setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S04 that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, or when it is not determined in S05 that the change process start switch 56 is in the ON state, the result of the RAM backup failure determination process of S03 is S06. It is determined whether or not it is defective. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is set. If the RAM error flag is set and it is determined that there is a defect, error processing is performed in S11, and power-on processing is ended. The error processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the RAM error flag is not set and it is not determined to be defective in S06, it is determined in S07 whether any of the reels 11L to 11R was rotating.

  When it is determined in S07 that any of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating, the reel restart state is set in S08. As a result, settings are made to restore the spinning state of the reels to the state before the power was turned off. In S09, sensor error (EA error) determination processing is performed, and the power-on processing is ended. In the sensor error (EA error) determination process, it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor 53 in the medal selector 48 is in the ON state, and when it is determined that it is in the ON state, the sensor error (EA error) flag is set as error data. Is a process for setting as.

  As shown in FIG. 42, during the setting change process in S10, error determination processes such as S06 and S09 are not performed. Therefore, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process when the setting change process is being executed.

<About timer interrupt processing>
As described above, the main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt. After the power-on process is completed, the main CPU 61 performs the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 every time a predetermined time elapses. In the timer interrupt process, first, in S15, the phase output process is performed on the reel motors 14L to 14R. Specifically, the excitation data for each rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is output to the stepping motors configuring the reel motors 14L to 14R.

  In S16, a command transmission process for transmitting a command from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side in a normal state is performed. In S17, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is turned on and the power is cut off. When it is determined that the power is cut off, the power is cut off in S23. In the power interruption process, the stack pointer, the power interruption flag, and the checksum value are set.

  If it is not determined in S17 that the power is cut off, the ramp process is performed in S18. In the lamp processing, the lamps / LEDs connected to the main control board 63 are drive-controlled. In S19, port input processing is performed. In the port input process, signals from switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 are input.

  In S20, monitoring processing of various sensors is performed. In the monitoring process of various sensors, for example, a process of monitoring a selector sensor such as the input sensor 53 mounted on the selector, a process of monitoring the payout sensor 54, and a process of monitoring the detection state of the door sensor 20 are performed. Error determination is performed based on the detection results of various sensors. Further, when an error is detected, the transmission command when the error occurs and various error data are set.

  In S21, it is determined whether or not the transmission command for specifying the error set in the monitoring process of S20 is set. If it is not determined that there is a transmission command, the process proceeds to S24, and if it is determined that there is a transmission command, a transmission command for specifying an error is transmitted from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side in S22. Command transmission processing for executing the command.

  In S24, it is determined whether error data is set. When it is determined in S24 that the error data is set, error processing is performed in S25, and the timer interrupt processing ends. The error processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S24 that the error data is set, the determination of inserting a medal is performed in S26. In S27, the payout determination of medals is performed. In S28, timer update processing is performed. In S29, port output processing is performed. In S30, external signal output processing is performed. In the external signal output processing, a signal for specifying the occurrence of an error, a signal for specifying the open / closed state of the front door 5 and the like are externally output to the hall computer managed by the manager of the game arcade. In S31, the control processing of the reels 11L to 11R is performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.

<About error handling>
Next, the error processing executed in S11 of FIG. 42 and S25 of FIG. 43 will be described. In the error processing, first, the current game state is saved in S35. In S36, an error flag corresponding to the error data is set and transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

  In S37, the contents of the payout display device 46 (display device for paying out game medals) are stored. In S38, the payout indicator 46 displays an error code. In S39, the states of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancel coil) are stored. In S40, the setting (OFF state setting) of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancel coil) is performed.

  Succeedingly, in S41, it is determined whether or not the state is the E4 error state (see S11 in FIG. 42). When it is determined that the E4 error state is set, the process proceeds to S53 and stands by until the setting change process is performed.

  If it is not determined in S41 that the E4 error state is set, it is determined in S42 whether the E3 error state (hopper empty error) is set. When it is determined that the E3 error state is set, the process proceeds to S43, and when it is determined that the E3 error state is not set, the process proceeds to S44.

  In S43, it is determined whether or not the error cancellation sensor is in the on state. Since S43 is a hopper empty error, the error release sensor here is a door key reset. The door key reset is realized by turning a key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. When it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is in the on state, the process proceeds to S46, and when it is determined that the error cancellation sensor is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S44.

  In S44, it is determined whether the reset switch 52 (setting change switch) is in the ON state. When it is determined that the reset switch 52 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to S45, and when it is determined that the reset switch 52 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S41.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 20 which is the door opening / closing sensor of the front door 5 is in the ON state. If it is determined to be in the on state, the process proceeds to S41, and if it is determined not to be in the on state, the process proceeds to S46.

  In S46, it is determined whether or not any one of the three selector sensors A, B, C forming the input sensor 53 and the two payout sensors A, B forming the payout sensor 54 are in the ON state. If it is determined to be in the on state, the process proceeds to S41, and if it is determined not to be in the on state, the process proceeds to S47.

  In S47, the states of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancel coil) are returned to their original states. In S48, the error code display is cleared (initialized). In S49, the content of the payout display device 46 (display device for the number of paid out game medals) is restored. In S50, the game state is restored. In S51, an error cancellation event (command) is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. In S52, it is determined whether or not the game medal payout start event (command) is transmitted to the sub CPU 71, and the error process ends.

<About the setting change process>
Next, the setting change process executed in S10 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. When starting the setting change process, the main CPU 61 outputs a setting change start command capable of specifying that fact to the sub CPU 71 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process, first, in S60, it is determined whether or not the backup failure of the RAM of the main CPU 61 is set. When it is not determined that the backup failure is set, the setting value information is read in S61, and the process proceeds to S65. At this time, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46 that functions as a set value display during the setting change process. The set value display is not limited to a display such as the payout display 46 that allows the display state to be confirmed even when the front door 5 is closed, but is also provided on the back side of the front door 5 and It may be a display device whose display state cannot be confirmed unless it is opened. Further, the set value display is not limited to a display that also displays other information, and may be a dedicated display provided only for displaying the set value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup failure is set, "C" is displayed on the payout indicator 46 in S62, and whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is turned on in S63. To be judged. If it is not determined to be in the on state, the standby state is entered, and if it is determined to be in the on state, "1" is set as the set value in S64, and the process proceeds to S65.

  In S65, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is in the on state. If it is determined to be in the on state, then the set value is updated in S66. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the start switch 19 is in the on state, it is determined in S67 whether the start switch 19 is detected in the on state. When it is not determined that it is detected, the process proceeds to S65.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the change processing start switch 56 is detected, it is determined in S68 whether the change processing start switch 56 is in the off state. If it is not determined to be the off state, the standby state is entered, and if it is determined to be the off state, the setting value is determined (stored in the RAM 65) in S69, and the setting change process ends. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized. As a result, the E4 error is released. Further, when the setting change processing is ended, the main CPU 61 outputs a setting change end command capable of specifying that fact to the sub CPU 71.

<About sub-control unit processing>
When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the sub CPU 71 performs a sub control unit process shown in FIG. In the sub-control unit processing, first, in S900, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 has become equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. When it is determined in S900 that the power is turned on, predetermined startup processing such as security check and operation confirmation of the liquid crystal display 27 is performed in S901. Then, in S902, processing according to various states is performed.

<Regarding sub-side setting change status processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side setting change state process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S910, it is determined whether or not the setting change processing is being executed on the main CPU 61 side (whether or not the setting change start command is received). If it is not determined in S910 that the setting is changed, the sub-side setting change state process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S910 that the setting is changed, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen of the administrator menu state. In addition, in S911, it is determined whether or not the operation of the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 has been detected. When it is determined that the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, the administrator menu process is performed in S913. As a result, the administrator menu screen is displayed.

  In S914, a time-out timer corresponding to the specific time is set. In S915, it is determined whether or not an operation on effect operation unit 81 has been detected. When it is determined in S915 that the operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected, the process proceeds to S913, and the display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed in the administrator menu state. Further, in S914, the timeout timer corresponding to the specific time is reset.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S915 that the operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined in S916 whether the timer set in S914 has timed out. If it is not determined in S916 that the time-out has occurred, it is determined in S917 whether the setting change state has ended (whether the setting change end command has been received), that is, whether the setting change processing has ended. If it is not determined in S917 that the setting change state has ended, the flow shifts to S915. If it is determined in S917 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S916 that the time-out has occurred, it means that the specific time has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 81, and thus the process proceeds to S911. As a result, the basic screen in the administrator menu state is displayed. After displaying the completion screen in the administrator menu state in S913, the process proceeds to S911 when the corresponding post-setting time (first to third post-setting time) elapses, and the basic state in the admin menu state is displayed. The screen is displayed.

  Returning to S911, when it is not determined that the operation of the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined in S912 whether the setting change state has ended. If it is not determined in S912 that the setting change state has ended, the process proceeds to S911. On the other hand, when it is determined in S912 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state process ends. After the administrator menu screen or the basic screen is finished in the sub-side setting change state process, a demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

<About the sub-game waiting process>
48 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side game standby process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S920, it is determined whether or not it is in the game standby state (when a specific effect is not executed, from when the game result command is received to when the reel rotation start command is received). If it is not determined in S920 that the game is in the game standby state, the sub-side game standby process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S920 that the game is in the standby state, the game screen or the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIG. Further, in S921, it is determined whether or not the operation of the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 has been detected. When it is determined that the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, the player menu process is performed in S923. As a result, the player menu screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. As described above, when the chance button effect is being executed, the player menu screen may not be displayed even if the decision switch 81a is operated.

  In S924, a time-out timer corresponding to the predetermined time is set. In S925, it is determined whether or not an operation on effect operation unit 81 has been detected. When it is determined in S925 that an operation on the effect operation unit 81 has been detected, the process moves to S923, and display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed as shown in FIG. Further, in S924, the timeout timer corresponding to the predetermined time is reset.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S925 that the operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined in S926 whether or not the timer set in S924 has timed out. If it is not determined in S926 that the time-out has occurred, it is determined in S927 whether the bet number is set (BET) or the start switch 19 (start lever) is operated (whether a bet command or a reel rotation start command is received). To be judged.

  If it is not determined in S927 that the start switch 19 has been operated for bet number setting, the process proceeds to S925. When it is determined in S927 that the bet number has been set or the start switch 19 has been operated, the sub game standby processing is ended. As a result, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that the time-out has occurred, it means that the predetermined time has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 81, and thus the process proceeds to S921. As a result, the demo screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

  Returning to S921, when it is not determined that the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined whether the bet number is set or the start switch 19 is operated in S922. If it is not determined in S922 that the start switch 19 has been operated nor the bet number setting, the process proceeds to S921. On the other hand, when it is determined in S922 that the bet number has been set or the start switch 19 has been operated, the sub-side game standby process is ended. As a result, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

<Regarding sub-side error notification processing>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side error notification process. In S930, it is determined whether a transmission command from the main CPU 61 has been received. The transmission command is a command transmitted in S22 based on the monitoring result of S20 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. If it is not determined in S930 that the transmission command has been received, the sub-side error notification process ends.

  When it is determined in S930 that the transmission command has been received, it is determined in S931 whether the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5. If it is not determined in S931 that the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5, error notification corresponding to the transmission command is performed in S932. Specifically, the speaker 31L, 31R outputs a sound such as "Error", and an error code such as "E3" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  In S933, it is determined whether an error flag has been received. The error flag is a flag transmitted in S36 of the error processing of FIG. 44 after the error occurs. When it is determined that the error flag has been received, the corresponding error notification is performed again in S934.

  In S935, it is determined whether an error release event is received. The error cancellation event is an event transmitted in S51 after error cancellation in the error processing of FIG. When it is not determined that the error cancellation event is received, the standby state is entered and error notification is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error cancellation event is received, the error notification is cleared (initialized) in S936, and the sub-side error notification process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S931 that the command regarding the door state is received, it is determined in S937 whether the front door 5 is in the open state. When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state, error notification is performed in S939, and the sub-side error notification process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined in S937 that the front door 5 is in the open state, it means that the front door 5 is in the closed state, so the error notification is cleared (initialized) in S938, and the sub-side error notification process is performed. To finish.

<Example of effects produced by the slot machine 1>
In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the chance button effect is not started in the period from the ON detection of the first stop operation to the ON detection of the third stop operation, which is the final stop operation. Therefore, the chance button effect that prompts the player to operate the decision switch 81a does not start while the player performs the first stop operation and then accepts the subsequent stop operation. As a result, while the first stop operation is performed and the subsequent stop operations are accepted, the flow of the game is not divided, and the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in good rhythm following the first stop operation. It is possible to prevent the stopping operation from being hindered.

  Also, the chance button effect is not started during the period from the detection of the bet number setting operation for setting the bet number to the ON operation detection of the start operation. Therefore, while the player is performing the bet number setting operation, the start operation has not been performed yet and it is not determined that the game will be performed. A chance button effect that prompts the player to operate the decision switch 81a. Never starts. As a result, for example, by confirming whether the chance button effect is executed by performing the bet number setting operation, if the chance button effect is not executed, the set bet number is released and the game is not executed. It is possible to prevent people from being fooled.

  The image corresponding to the chance button effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background. Therefore, for example, the processing load is not increased as compared with the case where the priority of the image corresponding to the chance button effect is set according to the type of the background. Further, it is not necessary to prepare an image corresponding to the background in which the image corresponding to the chance button effect is embedded. As a result, the image corresponding to the chance button effect can be reliably displayed.

  Further, the chance button effect (including the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect) is executed so that the distribution ratio illustrated in FIG. 15 is obtained. For example, when a privilege is awarded in each of the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the addition lottery, or when a bonus is won (the winning table in FIG. 15A), the CZ A special pattern that is a special mode is determined as the mode of the chance button effect at a higher rate than when the bonus is not awarded and the privilege is not given in the transition lottery or the like (the non-winning table in FIG. 15B). Therefore, when the chance button effect is started in the special mode, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

  Further, the proportion of the winning notification effect executed as the operation corresponding effect is when the third stop operation ON is detected as compared with the pattern (for example, the winning pattern 3) when the start ON is detected as the start timing of the chance button effect. The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) becomes higher. Therefore, when the chance button effect is started when the start ON is detected, when the third stop operation is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is increased. You can Further, when the start ON is detected, the expectation for the privilege being provided is increased, and the expectation for the privilege being provided is easily maintained until the third stop operation ON is detected. Can be improved. Further, since the winning notification effect is easily executed when the third stop operation ON is detected, it is easy to specify whether or not the privilege is granted when the third stop operation ON is detected, and the benefit is granted. It is possible to add sharpness to whether or not there is.

  Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the allocation ratio of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern of executing the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect is set to be higher than the ratio (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 4) started when the third stop operation ON is detected. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities to start the chance button effect of the pattern for executing the winning suggestion effect at the time of detecting the start ON and increase the sense of expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, the chance button effect in the special mode is such that when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 5 and 7), when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 6 and 8). Ratio) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is that the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 1 and 3) is more than the time when the third stop operation is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Ratio) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special mode when the third stop operation ON is detected, which is the timing after the start ON is detected.

  In the effect displayed in the standby state, which is a guide effect for guiding the player menu, an image smaller than the chance button effect is displayed in the display area near the edge of the liquid crystal display 27. For this reason, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent the guidance effect that prompts the operation of the determination switch 81a in a manner that makes the player feel excessively excited.

  Further, the chance button effect once started is continuously executed even after the period in which the chance button effect can be started has elapsed, and the operation of the decision switch 81a is effectively accepted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes the player to panic.

  When executing the chance button effect, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the decision switch 81a is controlled with a predetermined power consumption regardless of whether the eco mode is set as the power consumption mode. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the decision switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of the controlled power consumption mode, it is difficult for the player to notice that the chance button effect is being executed, and it is difficult to understand the target to be operated. It can be prevented.

  Further, the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment has the following effects.

  (1-1) As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the cumulative number reaches 2370 and the advantageous period is about to end, the ending telop is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a specific effect. As a result, even if the AT is terminated due to the reaching of the upper limit of the cumulative total, the fact that the AT has terminated is notified by the termination telop, so it is possible to prevent the AT from suddenly terminating, and the slot machine 1 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a sense of distrust. Further, in response to the display of the end telop, the display of the net additional number on the liquid crystal display 27 ends. As a result, the liquid crystal display 27 displays a net increase number of 2400 (or a value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) while reducing the discomfort caused by the end of the display of the net increase number during AT. It can be prevented. As a result, the player's ambition can be suppressed.

  (1-2) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, after the end telop is once displayed based on the cumulative total, it is determined as YES in SB11 of FIG. Since the display and the non-display of the net additional number are maintained, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, after displaying the ending telop, it is not necessary to perform the processing according to the cumulative number, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-3) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the end screen after the net addition number is hidden by the display of the end telop, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, regardless of the total number thereafter, The net increase is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the net addition number of 2400 or more from being displayed on the end screen. Further, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that the net extra number is displayed on the end screen even though the net extra number is not displayed according to the display of the end telop, which causes an uncomfortable feeling.

  (1-4) In the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment, regardless of the net additional number displayed in the AT, the end telop is uniformly displayed and the net additional number is not displayed according to the cumulative number. As a result, the AT does not end suddenly regardless of the displayed net increase number, and it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from feeling distrustful. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform the processing according to the displayed net increase number, the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-5) In the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown at SB12 in FIG. 19, when the AT is in progress, the cumulative total reaches the same 2370 regardless of whether the RBB is in progress or not. By this, the ending telop is displayed. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the processing depending on whether or not the RBB is in progress, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-5) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, etc., in the RBB controlled when the net additional number is not displayed in AT, Only the net increase in RBB is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of only the net increase in the RBB while preventing the net increase of 2400 or more from being displayed as the net increase in the AT.

  (1-6) In the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, etc., when the controlled RBB ends when the ending telop is displayed in the AT. As the end screen to be displayed, the net additional number in the AT is not displayed, and only the net additional number in the RBB is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the net increase in number as the RBB's game history while preventing the net increase in number of 2400 or more from being displayed as the AT's game history.

  (2-1) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the main CPU 61 side updates a plurality of types of game data in accordance with the progress of the game during the advantageous period, and when the advantageous period ends, a plurality of types of gaming data are updated. The game data is initialized (SA26 in FIG. 12). As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of types of game data from being carried over after the end of the advantageous period and being used for the progress of the game thereafter. On the other hand, on the sub CPU 71 side, a plurality of types of effect data are updated based on a command from the main CPU 61 for making it possible to specify a plurality of types of game data, and effects corresponding to the progress of the game can be executed. Of the plurality of types of effect data due to the end of the advantageous period, the number-related effect data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized (SB46 in FIG. 23). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the number-related effect data from being carried over after the end of the advantageous period and used for execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game thereafter. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent the net increase in number that can be specified from the number-related effect data during the advantageous period that has already ended being displayed in addition to the net increase in the advantageous period currently being controlled. As a result, the player's ambition can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, of the multiple types of effect data, unlike the effect data related to the number of coins that may arouse the player's aspiration, it has a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. The effect data not related to the number of sheets is not initialized when the advantageous period ends. For this reason, for example, an effect in which the number-of-sheets-unrelated effect data before the already ended advantageous period is taken into consideration can be executed during the currently controlled advantageous period. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect based on the game history during the advantageous period that ends within a range that does not arouse the player's motivation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (2-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, in the AT controlled by winning from the end of the advantageous period until the game is exhausted 100 times, It is possible to execute an effect according to the number-unrelated effect data updated before the previous advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of expecting to win a new AT from the end of the advantageous period until the game is exhausted 100 times, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  (2-3) In the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment, when the game is played 100 times without AT winning from the end of the advantageous period, as shown at SB48 in FIG. It is initialized. As a result, in a situation where the relationship with the previous advantageous period has already decreased, the production is executed based on the number-of-image-related production data before the relevant advantageous period, which reduces the interest of the game. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience.

  (2-4) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29E, etc., the star mark is based on the number of consecutive chans in the number-unrelated effect data before the previous advantageous period. The number of consecutive chan can be notified by the number of. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (e) and the like, it is possible to notify how many stories the story has progressed based on the number of stories in the number-of-sheets non-related effect data before the previous advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game without arousing the player's eagerness.

  (3-1) In the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment, even when the end ticker is displayed and the net additional number is hidden, the game history data for mobile interlocking is displayed regardless of the total number. It is updated in SB 42 of 23. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to generate and display a two-dimensional code capable of displaying a net increase in number exceeding 2370 or 2400 on the communication terminal. As a result, while controlling the display / non-display of the net added number in the slot machine 1 to suppress the player's ambition, the net added number hidden in the slot machine 1 in the communication terminal owned by the player and It becomes possible to display a net increase in number that cannot be displayed, and to update the game history of itself in the management server. For this reason, it is possible to meet the request of looking back and checking the game history of the player himself / herself and the request of keeping a record of the game history.

  (3-2) The slot machine 1 in the above embodiment does not initialize the game history data for portable interlocking used for generating the two-dimensional code when the advantageous period ends, as shown in FIG. . Therefore, even after the advantageous period is over, the two-dimensional code generated based on the game history data for mobile interlocking can be generated and reflected in the communication terminal owned by the player or the management server. As a result, even after the advantageous period ends, it is possible to display not only the net increase in the number of games but also other game histories on the communication terminal. Therefore, the player can look back and check the game history during the advantageous period that has already ended, through the communication terminal.

  (4) The slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment calculates the net additional number in the net additional number calculation period from the time of being controlled by ART to the end of the advantageous period by SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. With SB06 and SB22 of FIG. 19, the net additional number is displayed during AT or bonus. Further, until the calculated net additional number reaches the specific number "2000" OVER display number, the net additional number is displayed in the normal mode shown in FIG. 25, FIG. When the number of net additions reaches the OVER display number of "2000", the number of net additions is displayed in the rainbow mode shown in FIG. 26B, etc., and thereafter, the number of net additions is "2000" as shown in FIG. Even when it is less than ", the rainbow display is maintained. As a result, after the net added number reaches the OVER display number of "2000", the rainbow mode is displayed regardless of whether the net added number is less than "2000". As a result, it is possible to know whether or not the "2000" OVER display number has been reached depending on whether or not the net additional number is displayed in the rainbow mode, and even if the player misses the "2000" OVER display or the like. Even after that, it is possible to understand that the slot machine 1 is operating normally by displaying the net increase in the rainbow mode, and it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from feeling distrustful. .

  In addition, the net additional number is continuously calculated even during the bonus controlled by winning during AT, and when the net additional number reaches the OVER display number of "2000" during the bonus, FIG. ), The net additional number is displayed in the rainbow mode, and even if the net additional number becomes less than “2000” thereafter, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. As a result, the AT and the bonus can be related in the point of calculating and displaying the net additional number, and the interest of the game can be improved, and even when the bonus is controlled, the net additional number is in the rainbow mode. It is possible to know whether or not the number of OVER display of "2000" has been reached by whether or not it is displayed, and it is also understood that the slot machine 1 is operating normally by displaying the net additional number in the rainbow mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from feeling distrustful.

  Further, even during the RBB internal winning state where the bonus is won, the net additional number is continuously calculated. On the other hand, as shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 28, the display of the net additional number is suspended after the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed until the bonus is controlled. This allows the player to concentrate on winning the winning bonus and controlling it to the bonus when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed. Further, when the net increase in number reaches the number of OVER display of "2000" from the time the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed to the time when the bonus is controlled, after the bonus is controlled as shown in FIG. 28 (d). After the net increase in number is displayed in the normal mode, the net increase in number is displayed in the rainbow mode when a medal is awarded for a small winning a prize as shown in FIG. 28 (e). As a result, the net extra number is suddenly displayed in a rainbow manner at the moment when it is controlled by the bonus, which gives the impression that a special effect (for example, high setting suggestion) may have been executed. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Further, during the period from the display of the bonus winning confirmation screen to the control of the bonus, the bonus display is not executed and the OVER display is not executed even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number. After that, as shown in FIG. 28E, the OVER display is executed when a medal is awarded by a small winning a prize or the like. This allows the player to concentrate on winning the bonus that has been won and controlling it to the bonus when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, and the OVER display is suddenly displayed at the moment when the bonus is controlled. By being executed, it is possible to prevent the user from having an impression that a special effect has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20 and the like, when the net additional number reaches the number of OVER display less than “2000”, the OVER display is displayed in the normal mode, and when the net additional number reaches the number of OVER display of more than “2000”. The OVER display is displayed in a rainbow manner. In other words, the slot machine 1, when the net increase in the advantageous state reaches any one of a plurality of types determined in advance including a number less than the specific number and a number greater than the specific number, the stage number concerned. The arrival effect display means for displaying the arrival effect indicating that the arrival effect has been reached, and the arrival effect display means displays the arrival effect in the predetermined display mode when the net increase reaches the number of stages less than the specific number. When the net increase number reaches the specific number or more, the reaching effect is displayed in the special display mode. Thus, by interlocking the display mode of the OVER display with the display mode of the net additional number display, it is possible to notify the player in a visually easy-to-understand manner whether the net additional number is less than or equal to “2000”.

  Further, when the AT or the bonus ends without the calculated net additional number reaching the OVER display number of “2000”, the end screen is displayed in the normal mode as shown in FIG. When the AT or bonus ends after the net added number reaches the OVER display number of "2000", it is less than or equal to "2000" as shown in FIGS. 26 (e) and (e '). Regardless, the end screen is displayed in a rainbow manner. That is, the slot machine 1 is provided with game result display means for displaying a game result including the net increase calculated by the net increase calculation means when the advantageous state ends, and the game result display means displays the net increase number. When the advantageous state ends without reaching the specific number, the game result is displayed in the predetermined display mode, and when the advantageous state ends after the net increase reaches the specific number, the advantageous state The game result is displayed in the special display mode irrespective of whether or not the net increase number at the time of is reached the specific number. Thus, by interlocking the display mode of the end screen with the display mode of the net increase number display, the display mode of the end screen is different based on the net increase number when the end screen is displayed even though the net increase number display is the rainbow mode. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that confuses the player by being displayed with. Further, since it is not necessary to change the display mode of the end screen according to the net increase in number when the end screen is displayed, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the end screen is displayed.

  26 (b), the display mode of the net increase number when the OVER display number of "2000" is reached is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27 (d) and FIG. 28 (e), it is a common rainbow mode. That is, in the slot machine 1, the special display mode of the display modes of the net increase is the same display mode regardless of the state when the net increase reaches a specific number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the display data used for the display of the net additional number from being extremely increased after the number of OVER display of "2000" is reached.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 26B to 26D, etc., after reaching the OVER display number of the net addition number of “2000” and performing the OVER display of “2000”, the net addition number is “2000”. Even if "2000" is reached again after the number becomes less than "2000", the OVER display of "2000" will not be performed again, but will it be less than "2000" after displaying the net additional number display in rainbow mode? Whether or not, the rainbow display is maintained. That is, the slot machine 1 includes a specific number arrival effect display unit that displays a specific number arrival effect when the net increase number in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, and the specific number arrival effect display unit is the net increase number. After the number reaches the specific number and displays the specific number reaching effect, the specific number reaching effect, even when the net increase is less than the specific number and reaches the specific number again Whether or not the net increase becomes less than the specific number after the net increase reaches the specific number and displays the net increase in the special display mode without displaying again. Regardless, the display in the special display mode is maintained. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player whether or not "2000" has been reached by the display mode of the net increase in number display while preventing the OVER display of "2000" from frequently occurring in a short period of time. .

  Further, as the display data used for the display of the net increase in number, the display data in the normal mode and the display data in the rainbow mode are stored in the ROM 77 in advance. Regarding the display data for the OVER display, the display data in the normal mode in which the number of net additions is less than “2000” and the display data in the rainbow mode in which the number of net additions is “2000” or more are stored in advance in the ROM 77. There is. Therefore, it is not necessary to generate the display data in the rainbow mode by the image processing, and the image processing load can be reduced.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment displays a caution message during the ending background display for ending the advantageous state. However, as shown in FIG. 32, a caution is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the ending background. Further, the warning display is performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the warning display from being obstructed by the ending background.

  Further, even before the predetermined time during which the caution display is performed, as shown in FIGS. 35 (c), (d), (g), and (i), the navigation effect, the history display, and the navigation display are displayed as the specific display. Dialogue display (first stage), error notification, etc. are performed. However, as shown in FIG. 32B, the specific display is performed in the area that does not overlap the area used for the caution display. Therefore, it is possible to perform the specific display while preventing the caution display from being disturbed by the specific display. As a result, it is possible for the player to fully exercise the function of calling attention by allowing the player to visually recognize the caution display during the caution display, and to provide information according to the type of the specific display to the player or the clerk of the playground. Can be reliably notified.

  Further, since the suggestion display is an image that suggests the advantage of the slot machine 1, it is an image that draws the player's attention. When the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed, as shown in FIGS. , First, after the indication is displayed, the notice is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention display from being overlooked and the attention display being overlooked, as compared with the case where the attention display and the suggestion display are simultaneously displayed. As a result, while the caution display is being performed, the player can fully exercise the function of calling attention by being able to visually recognize the caution display, and the suggestion display suggests the advantage to improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

  Further, when the advantageous state ends, the player has acquired a relatively large number of medals in the advantageous state. A warning is displayed during the ending background display in such a situation. Therefore, the function of alerting can be exhibited in an effective scene.

  Further, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment starts the caution display as shown in FIG. 35 (c) and then ends the caution display as shown in FIGS. 35 (d), (g) and (i). Until then, the display mode (predetermined mode) from the beginning of the display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked, as compared with a case where the display mode of the caution display changes (movement of display position, etc.) in the middle.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown at timing 6 in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), it is assumed that an operation for starting a game (setting of the bet number, operation of the start switch 19) is performed. Also, the caution display is maintained until a predetermined time elapses. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the attention display from being overlooked, as compared with a case where the attention display is changed (movement of the display position or the like) by accepting the game operation.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32 and the like, the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed in different areas. Therefore, the caution display is performed in a region different from the region in which the suggestion display was performed, so that the player can easily notice that the display content is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the warning display from being overlooked.

  (6) The slot machine 1 in the above embodiment executes the setting process related to the AT on the main CPU 61 side, as shown in S700 of FIG. 5 and FIG. However, whether or not the main CPU 61 is in a situation where the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed during AT, as shown in the additional lottery column of SA04 of FIG. 9 and FIG. Regardless of the above, when the additional lottery conditions are met, the additional lottery is uniformly performed. For example, even when the number of remaining AT games has already exceeded the upper limit number of remaining games, when the additional lottery conditions are satisfied, the additional lottery is performed in the same manner as when the number of remaining AT games does not exceed the upper limit number of remaining games. I do. When the upper limit number of times of the advantageous period is reached, the AT and the advantageous period are ended. As a result, since there is no processing step for determining whether or not the situation is such that the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side are increased. Without doing so, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high by setting an upper limit on the AT and the advantageous period.

  On the other hand, on the side of the sub CPU 71, a predetermined effect including an additional effect and a special background is controlled according to whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. . Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect according to the AT and the game situation in the advantageous period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as shown in FIG. 37 and the like, when the period controlled by the AT is actually extended, the additional effect is executed, and the period controlled by the AT is actually increased by reaching the upper limit number of the advantageous period. When it is not extended, the addition effect is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the AT is ended by reaching the upper limit number of the advantageous period even though the number of AT games notified by the additional effect has not been exhausted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 61 outputs an additional game number command, a remaining AT game number command, and a remaining upper limit game number command for each game. The remaining AT game number specified by the remaining AT game number command includes the additional game number added in the game. As a result, the sub CPU 71 side that receives the command determines whether or not it is in a state of reaching the upper limit number of advantageous periods and terminating before the remaining AT game number is consumed, including the number of additional games this time. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence / absence of the addition effect.

  Further, during the bonus controlled by winning the bonus until the AT ends, as described in SA01 and SA02 of FIG. 9, the remaining AT game number is not subtracted and updated (consumed), while the remaining upper limit game number is Subtract update (consumption). As a result, even if the bonus is controlled before the AT is finished, the period controlled by the AT is shortened and the player is disadvantaged by the bonus control. On the other hand, since the upper limit number of the advantageous period is not substantially extended, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  (7) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the player menu screen is ended without operating the effect operation unit 81 during the specific time period for ending the administrator menu screen without operating the effect operation unit 81. It is set to be shorter than a predetermined time period. For this reason, for example, when the administrator leaves the display without any operation due to other work entering the administrator menu screen, or forgetting that the administrator menu screen is being displayed and opening the game hall. Even in the case where the player menu screen is displayed, the manager menu screen can be ended earlier than when the player menu screen is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will see the administrator menu screen that only the administrator should confirm and set. On the contrary, since the player menu screen is displayed longer than the administrator menu screen even if the effect operation unit 81 is not operated, there is a relatively large margin while checking the game items at the player's pace. Settings can be made. That is, it is possible to provide a slot machine in which the possibility that the administrator menu screen is seen by the player can be reduced, while the display on the player menu screen can be confirmed with a margin.

  In addition, after the administrator menu screen is terminated due to the lapse of a specific time, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). In this way, the display state is controlled such that it is impossible to grasp or predict the management item displayed immediately before the administrator menu screen is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ascertaining what kind of management item the manager was checking or trying to set.

  In addition, when a management item such as sub-clear or date / time setting is set on the administrator menu screen, the completion screen is displayed, and the LCD The display state of the display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). This prevents the completion screen from being displayed forever. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set management item from being specified by the player even after the management item is set on the manager menu screen. Further, the post-setting time is set to be shorter than the specific time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the completion screen is specified by the player.

  Further, the post-setting time is set to be different depending on the set management item. Therefore, the administrator menu screen can be terminated when the time corresponding to the type of the set management item elapses. Further, the post-setting time is set to a time (for example, a time longer than the time required for storing / processing) according to the time required for storing / processing the information of the setting item. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the internal setting has not been completed even though the completion screen has ended, and at the same time, displaying the completion screen can reassure the administrator.

  Also, a completion screen is displayed when a management item is set. By doing this, it is necessary to check again whether the administrator is set or not, as compared to the case where it is unclear whether the setting could be made because the completion screen is not displayed. It can be prevented.

  An administrator who displays / sets management items on the administrator menu screen generally manages a plurality of slot machines installed in a game arcade. Therefore, it can be expected that the management work will be a flow work, and in this case, there is a possibility that it becomes unclear as to what number of management items the management items have been set, the setting change process has been completed, and the like. In consideration of such a situation, in the slot machine 1, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is made different when the administrator menu screen is normally terminated and when it is terminated after a lapse of a specific time. That is, in the slot machine 1, the change process start switch 56 is turned off after the start switch 19 is operated, and the setting change process is completed, not only when the specific time has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 81. Sometimes the display of the administrator menu screen is terminated. However, when the display of the administrator menu screen ends after a specific time elapses without operating the effect operation unit 81, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen (black screen). On the other hand, when the setting change process is completed, a demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Therefore, even under the above-mentioned situation, by confirming the display state of the liquid crystal display 27, it is possible to know whether or not the setting change process has been terminated and the administrator menu screen has been normally terminated. . As a result, although the administrator menu screen has been closed, the change process start switch 56 is not turned off, and the game hall is opened in a state where the setting change process is not completed normally. Can be prevented in advance.

  In addition, the manager menu screen cannot be easily confirmed by the player because it is necessary to shift the setting change process to the setting menu. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the display trigger and the termination trigger of the player menu screen can be established by a common operation of operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. On the other hand, no common operation is provided for the display trigger and the termination trigger of the administrator menu screen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the management menu screen from being terminated due to an erroneous operation and thus reducing management work efficiency.

  Also, when a management item is set on the administrator menu screen, the screen always returns to the basic screen, but even if a game item is set on the player menu screen, the display of the player menu screen is maintained. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player by making it possible to continuously set other game items on the player menu screen while reducing the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player. You can

  When an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is displayed, the error notification is prioritized over the administrator menu screen. Therefore, while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, the management work can be continued without being affected by the error on the main CPU 61 side, and when an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side that controls the display of the administrator menu screen itself, By prioritizing the error notification, it is possible to prevent the administrator menu screen from being continuously displayed in a state where there is a possibility that the management item cannot be normally displayed or set.

<Modification>
It should be considered that the above-described embodiments are illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope. The following is a modification of the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the chance button effect is started when the start operation is detected to be ON or when the third stop operation is detected to be ON has been described. However, the chance button effect is not limited to this as long as it is started in at least one of the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. For example, the operation may be started in either the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. The chance button effect may be started when the start operation is detected to be OFF or when the third stop operation is detected to be OFF (when the pressing operation is completed), or the start operation or the first operation. 3 The operation may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop operation was detected. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start operation or the third stop operation was detected and the first stop operation after the start operation or the bet number setting operation after the third stop operation has already been detected, the chance button effect is produced. You may control not to start.

  Although the chance button effect in the above-described embodiment and the modified example has been described with respect to an example executed in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, an example executed in the game, the invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may make it determine the game (for example, how many times of game) which performs the said chance button effect, and may perform it in the said game. That is, whether or not to execute the chance button effect and the game to be executed may be determined in advance, and the chance button effect may be executed when the game is reached.

  When the chance button effect in the above-described embodiment and modification is once started in the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection, the period elapses. An example has been described in which the processing is continuously executed even after the above, and is ended by operating the determination switch 81a. However, after the chance button effect is started, the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection is performed even if the decision switch 81a is not operated. It may be ended by ending, a predetermined time after the end of the period, or a predetermined time after starting the chance button effect.

  In the above-described embodiments and modified examples, the normal mode and the special mode are illustrated one by one as modes of the chance button effect, but the invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal modes may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of special modes may be provided. Moreover, although the start timing of the chance button effect is described as an example that is started at a common timing (for example, the timing when the target operation is detected to be ON) regardless of the mode, the invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the chance button effect is not limited to this. It may be started at a different timing according to. For example, the start timing of the chance button effect in the normal mode is started at the timing when the target operation is detected to be ON, whereas the start timing of the chance button effect in the special mode is the OFF operation of the target operation. It may be started at the detected timing.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified example, as an example of the continuous effect pattern, an example in which the chance button effect is performed twice during one continuous effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. However, the continuous effect pattern may include a pattern in which the chance button effect is performed once or a pattern in which the chance button effect is performed three or more times in one continuous effect. When the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, it suffices that the chance button effect that executes the winning suggestion effect is not executed after the chance button effect that executes the winning notification effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the pattern is not limited to the pattern configured such that the chance button effect that executes the winning suggestion effect is executed and then the chance button effect that executes the winning notification effect is executed. It may include a pattern configured only by chance button effects for executing the winning suggestion effect, and a pattern configured only by chance button effects for executing the winning notification effect. In addition, in the case where the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, it suffices that the chance button effect in the normal mode is not executed after the chance button effect in the special mode is executed, for example, in FIG. As shown, a pattern for performing only the chance button effect in the normal mode, a pattern for performing the chance button effect in the special mode after executing the chance button effect in the normal mode, and only the chance button effect in the special mode as shown in FIG. May be included in the pattern.

  Further, the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect have been described as an example that is predetermined according to the pattern of the continuous effect. However, the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect are not limited to this, and whether or not the chance button effect is executed during the start operation detection or the third stop operation detection during the continuous effect. You may make it perform the lottery about the kind etc. when performing, and perform a chance button production according to the said lottery result. Even in this case, when the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect that executes the winning suggestion effect is not executed after the opportunity button effect that executes the winning notification effect is executed, In addition, a lottery related to the chance button effect may be executed so that the chance button effect in the normal mode is not executed after the chance button effect in the special mode is executed.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the ending telop is displayed and the net additional number is hidden when it is determined that the cumulative number is 2370 or more in SB12 of FIG. However, not limited to this, for example, even if the cumulative number becomes 2370 or more, the net additional number is continuously displayed and when the cumulative number reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400), the update display of the net additional number is stopped. Alternatively, the update display of the net additional number may be stopped when the cumulative number becomes, for example, a value that reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400) when the maximum payout number of one game is added. Further, not limited to the cumulative number, the update display of the net additional number may be stopped when the displayed net additional number itself reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400). When the maximum payout number of games is added, the update display of the net additional number may be stopped when the maximum cumulative number (2400) is reached or more. Further, when the update display of the net extra number is stopped, an image indicating that the upper limit is reached in a region having a higher priority than the layer displaying the net extra number and overlapping with the net extra number (for example, “OVER” or A message image such as “LIMIT” may be displayed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the update display of the net additional number is stopped by reaching the upper limit cumulative number. FIG. 50A shows a state in which both the cumulative total number and the net additional number in AT have reached “2396”. In addition, in FIG. 50 (a), an example is shown in which the cumulative number and the net additional number are the same value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the maximum number of payouts of one game is added, the upper limit cumulative number ( If the value reaches 2400), the net additional number may be another value (for example, "1600"). FIG. 50 (b) is a game after the bet number is set in the state shown in FIG. 50 (a), a small winning combination is won, and the maximum payout number of one game is added to the total number and the net increase number. Shows a display example when both reach the upper limit cumulative number. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the update of the net additional number is stopped at "2400", and a message image such as "OVER" is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the net additional number display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number exceeding the upper limit "2400" (the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) of the accumulated number from being displayed as the net increase number, and to notify that the upper limit accumulated number has been reached. Can inform.

  Further, when the update display of the net added number is stopped when the cumulative number or the net added number reaches the upper limit cumulative number, the display mode of the net added number is changed (for example, the display color of the image is changed (gray out, etc.)). You may FIG. 50C shows a display example when the display mode of the net increase in number is changed to a semitransparent mode (thinned in FIG. 50C). Even when the cumulative total number is 2370 or more and the net additional number is continuously displayed, the ending telop may be displayed when the cumulative number is determined to be 2370 or more. The ending telop itself may not be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the number-unrelated performance data among the performance data may be carried over until the game is exhausted 100 times after the end of the advantageous period, and may be carried over thereafter even if the AT is won within the period. I explained the possible examples. However, the period in which the number-unrelated effect data is carried over is not limited to the period in which the game is consumed 100 times. Further, the condition for carrying over even after the period for carrying over the number-unrelated effect data is not limited to AT winning within the period, for example, AT winning and being controlled by AT within the period, or It may be that the advantageous period is controlled again within the period, the advantageous period is controlled within the period, and the CZ is controlled.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, the game history data for cell-phone interlocking has been described as an example in which it is continuously updated and carried over without being initialized until the cell-phone interlocking is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the carry-on game history data may have a carry-over period defined, like the number-unrelated effect data. The game history data for linking mobile phones may be carried over until the game is exhausted 100 times after the advantageous period ends. In addition, the conditions for carrying over the game history data for carrying the cell phone even after the period for carrying over is, for example, to win AT within the period, to win AT within the period and be controlled by AT, The control may be performed again within the advantageous period, within the period, controlled within the advantageous period, and controlled by CZ.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, the example in which the confirmation screen is displayed by the RBB winning has been described. However, when the RBB is won during the ending telop display, the ending telop display may be continued without displaying the confirmation screen, or the confirmation screen may be displayed while continuing the ending telop display, and the ending telop display is terminated. Alternatively, the confirmation screen may be displayed. Further, when the condition for displaying the ending telop is satisfied while the confirmation screen is displayed, the confirmation screen display may be terminated and the termination telop may be displayed, or the termination telop may be displayed while continuing the confirmation screen display. Good. In the confirmation screen, an example of notifying the winning RBB symbol in FIG. 27 (b) (also referred to as winning RBB notification) has been described. It may overlap with the part. Even in this case, it is sufficient that both the display of the ending telop and the display of the winning RBB notification are displayed so that the player can recognize or specify.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, an example has been described in which, during the end telop display, the OVER display is not executed even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number. However, even when the ending ticker is displayed and the net extra number is not displayed, when the internally updated net extra number reaches the set OVER display number, the corresponding OVER display is executed. You may do it. As shown in FIG. 20, the number of OVER display sheets is set to be less than 2400. Therefore, even if the OVER display is executed, the net increase of 2400 or more is not displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified example, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, etc., when the ending telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, the net additional number is hidden, but the AT game number continues. The example of displaying is explained. However, when the ending telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, not only the number of net additions but also the number of AT games may be hidden. That is, when the ending telop is displayed, no information regarding the progress of the game may be displayed. Further, even when the ending telop based on the number of games is displayed, the net additional number may be hidden, or both the net additional number and the AT game number may be hidden.

  In the above-described embodiments and modified examples, the example in which the ending telop is continuously displayed until the advantageous period ends once the display is started has been described. However, when the RBB is won and the RBB is started during the ending telop display, the ending telop display may be ended and the effect corresponding to the RBB may be started.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, the example in which the AT is controlled only once in one advantageous period and when the AT ends, the advantageous period is also ended and the normal period is controlled is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT may be controllable multiple times in one advantageous period. For example, after the AT ends, the CZ is controlled, and the AT is again controlled by winning the AT in the CZ, while the advantageous period is reached when the number of games that can be controlled in the CZ is exhausted without the AT winning in the CZ. May be ended and control may be performed during the normal period. Further, in the case where the AT can be controlled a plurality of times in one advantageous period, for example, the period for carrying over the number-of-sheets non-related effect data is 100 times after the AT ends even if it is within one advantageous period. It may be limited to the digestion period. In other words, when the game is not controlled again by the AT from the end of the AT until the game is exhausted 100 times, the number-unrelated effect data may not be carried over even after one advantageous period.

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the end telop display based on the cumulative total ends when the cumulative total exceeds 2400. That is, the end telop display is not ended in advance. For example, in the case where the total number of payouts (12) in one game is more than 2400, and the ending telop display is terminated when the game in which “BEL” is won is started, the player's operation is performed. Depending on the mode, the total number may not exceed 2400, and it is necessary to display the ending telop again. It is possible to prevent such a wasteful process from being performed and a display that makes the user feel uncomfortable. It should be noted that the end telop display based on the cumulative total is the cumulative total of more than 2400 when the maximum payout number (12 cards) is added in one game, and when it is decided that the correct answer procedure is operated in the game in which "BEL" is won. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed when it is confirmed that the operation is performed in the correct answer procedure (switch to a message such as "you have reached the upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 sheets"). Further, the end telop display may be ended after changing the display mode when the cumulative number exceeds 2,400, for example. For example, in the end ticker display, when the total number exceeds 2400, the end ticker display may be ended after switching to a message such as "the upper limit of the advantageous period is 2400". Further, the ending telop may be ended when the third stop operation is separated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, the example in which the special background is set when the remaining AT game number is equal to or more than the remaining upper limit game number in SB55 of FIG. 36 has been described. However, the condition for setting the special background is, instead of or in addition to this, by multiplying the number of remaining AT games by the average number of net additions per game in AT calculated from the winning probability of the winning combination, etc. The "predicted net increase in number" is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the "predicted net increase in number" is greater than or equal to "(upper limit 2400)-(cumulative number at present)". )-(Cumulative number at the present time) ", the special background may be set by shifting to SB58.

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, when the RBB is won and controlled to RBB during the ending telop display based on the cumulative total, the ending telop display may be ended when the RBB is controlled, and the ending telop is displayed during the RBB. The ending telop display may be ended when the advantageous period ends. Further, in the RBB, as shown in FIG. 24, even when the ending telop is displayed, information about the net increase in number in the RBB is displayed, but when the ending telop is displayed. It is also possible not to display the information regarding the net increase in number in the RBB. Further, although an example in which information regarding the net number of copies in the RBB is displayed on the termination screen when the controlled RBB is terminated during the termination telop display based on the cumulative number has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The end screen may be configured such that no information regarding the net increase in number is displayed.

  When displaying the ending telop based on the cumulative total in the above-described embodiment and modification, a notice effect indicating the possibility of displaying the ending telop may be executed. As the notice production, for example, a message such as "may the upper limit of 2400 be reached soon" may be displayed. Further, the notice effect may be executed, for example, when the current cumulative number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2350) that is smaller than the cumulative number that triggers the display of the ending telop. As a result, the possibility that the ending telop will be displayed can be notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, the effect in the same manner as the notice effect may be executed by winning in a predetermined lottery even when the cumulative number is less than the predetermined value. As a result, when the effect in the same manner as the notice effect is executed, the player can have a thrilling feeling that the advantageous period may end when the upper limit is reached.

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the value that triggers the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number is set to 2370 uniformly. However, the value that triggers the display of the ending telop based on the cumulative number is calculated from a plurality of values (for example, 2000, 2100, 2200, 2300, 2370, etc.) every time it is controlled in the advantageous period or each AT is controlled. You may make it determine by random number lottery. Regardless of which value is determined, the display mode (message content etc.) of the ending telop may be the same mode. As a result, even after the ending telop is displayed, the values up to the upper limit are different, so that the AT can be expected to continue.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the effect data and the game history data stored due to the advantageous period, the end of the mobile interlocking, and the like are initialized has been described. However, the slot machine 1 may update the analysis data for identifying all the game histories performed in the slot machine 1 in addition to the effect data and the game history data. The analysis data is, for example, data that a manufacturer or the like collects the slot machine 1 and uses only for analysis, and is data that cannot be used for progress of a game or performance of the slot machine 1.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, an example used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period or AT based on the number-of-sheets non-related effect data carried over after the advantageous period has been described. However, not only during the next advantageous period or AT, but also based on the number-unrelated effect data carried over after the advantageous period ends, the type and content of the effect to be executed in the normal period, the advantageous general, and the CZ are determined. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the number-unrelated effect data is carried over after the advantageous period ends has been described. However, the number-unrelated effect data may be carried over after the advantageous period ends only when the game history in the finished advantageous period satisfies the special condition. The special condition may be a condition that is satisfied, for example, that the story reaches up to fifteen episodes, that the premium effect has been executed, and that the net additional number is a predetermined number (for example, 500) or more.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, an example in which the game history data for cell-phone interlocking is not used when determining the type or content of the effect to be executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data during cell-phone interlocking Not only that, the type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined by using the game history data for mobile communication.

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the net additional number is hidden according to the display of the ending telop has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the non-display, and for example, the display mode is changed to display the net additional number. Alternatively, the item image or the like corresponding to the net increase may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period (AT) is determined according to the number-unrelated effect data that is not initialized by the end of the advantageous period has been described. The target of the determined effect is not limited to the display effect executed by displaying on the liquid crystal display 27, but may be a light effect executed by a lamp or an LED, and is a sound effect output from the speakers 31L, 31R. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, an example in which the number of stories is increased as the game progresses has been described as an effect during AT. However, the production during AT is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a production in which a fighting battle is performed and the number of rounds is increased according to the progress of the game, and when a special condition is satisfied (the net number increase is 2000). It is also possible to execute an ending effect that is executed only when the number of games reaches, the number of AT games reaches 1000, etc.). In such a case, as the number-unrelated effect data, the data that specifies the number of rounds, whether or not the ending effect is executed, etc. is updated, and after the advantageous period ends, the effect according to the number of rounds or whether or not the ending effect is effected. May be executed. For example, when the ending effect is being executed, an image imitating a trophy may be displayed during AT in the next advantageous period.

  In FIG. 31 in the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the AT net extra number itself is displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player based on the game history data for mobile interlocking has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. An image (for example, one dollar box image corresponding to 100 sheets) corresponding to the AT AT net increase number may be displayed.

(A) Case of carrying over effect data having a direct relationship with medals In the above-described embodiment, the maximum number of cumulative totals of “2400” is set as the net additional number during the advantageous period notified on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. In order to not notify more than the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number for one game to ", the end is reached when the upper limit of the cumulative number during the advantageous period is reached soon (the cumulative number reaches" 2370 ") The example in which the telop is displayed and the effect data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized in SB46 of FIG. 23 every time the advantageous period ends is described. However, this is not limited to this, as long as the value equal to or greater than the maximum payout number for one game is not notified to “2400”, which is the upper limit value of the cumulative number, and for example, when the advantageous period ends. Also, the effect data (for example, cumulative number, net additional number, etc.) that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period may be carried over without being initialized. The type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined and executed based on the effect data. For example, when the cumulative number (or net additional number) in the advantageous period does not reach "2400" (or "2370"), the effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. (For example, the total number, the number of net additions, etc.) may be carried over afterwards without being initialized. Even in this case, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, when the game is played 100 times without winning the AT from the end of the previous advantageous period, the effect data inherited from the previous advantageous period is initialized. However, it may not be reflected in subsequent productions by not carrying over. In the following, an example will be described in which effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is succeeded thereafter.

-Example of reflecting in the net increase in number display An example in which the net increase in the previous advantageous period is succeeded thereafter will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining an example of an increase / decrease in the cumulative number counter and the net increase in number during the advantageous period. In FIG. 51, the ordinate shows a slump graph in which the type of controlled period, the cumulative number counter, the ending telop, the net increase number, and the net increase number are graphed from the top, and the abscissa indicates from the left. To the right, the passage of time (digesting the game) is shown. In FIG. 51, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the first advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 51) ends, the advantageous period is again referred to as the second advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 51). Control) is shown as an example.

  First, when the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 of FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 of FIG. 11, the advantageous period counter and the total number counter according to the progress of the game. The value of is updated. In the first advantageous period of FIG. 51, an example is shown in which the AT is controlled as well as during the advantageous period. When controlled to AT (net increase number calculation period), the net increase number is updated in accordance with the progress of the game as shown in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. During AT, for example, the navigation effect is executed when the push-order bell is won, so that the value of the cumulative number counter increases and the net additional number also increases as shown in the slump graph. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 of FIG. 18 and SB22 of FIG. 19, the net additional number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  In FIG. 51, in accordance with the progress of the game thereafter, when the cumulative number of games and the total number of net additions reached "900" by digesting the game 500 times, the first advantageous period ends and the normal period is controlled. The case is shown. When the first advantageous period ends, the game data during the first advantageous period is initialized, while SB45 and SB46 in FIG. 23 are not processed, and thus the payout is made during the first advantageous period. The effect data (effect data managed on the sub CPU 71 side) including effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals is inherited thereafter. In addition, on the condition that the cumulative number (or the net additional number) has not reached “2400” which is the upper limit, the effect data including effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. When the cumulative number (or net additional number) has reached the upper limit of "2400", at least the effect data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is subsequently set. You may not take over.

  In FIG. 51, it is assumed that the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24) is controlled again after the game is played a predetermined number of times (100) after being controlled in the normal period. In this modified example, the net additional number of sheets inherited from the first advantageous period is updated according to the progress of the game even in the normal period. In the second advantageous period, the AT is controlled after the advantageous general and CZ are controlled for a predetermined period. When controlled during the advantageous period, the values of the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated according to the progress of the game even if the net increase in number is succeeded. Even if controlled during the advantageous period, the navigation effect is not executed during the advantageous general or during CZ, so the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and "0" is set as shown at SA16 in FIG. Further, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in number also decreases during the advantageous general or CZ as in the normal period.

  In the second advantageous period of FIG. 51, it is assumed that the AT is controlled after the advantageous general and CZ are passed. When controlled by the AT, the update display is performed from the net increase in the number of sheets, which has been updated from the first advantageous period. It should be noted that it is possible to update and display from the net increase in number succeeded from the first advantageous period by performing AT winning or AT control until the game is played a predetermined number of times (100) after being controlled in the normal period. In FIG. 51, since 150 medals have been consumed and controlled by the AT after the end of the first advantageous period, the liquid crystal display 27 updates and displays the net increase in number from "750" (= 900-150).

  In FIG. 51, when the cumulative number in the advantageous period does not reach the upper limit value in accordance with the progress of the game thereafter, and the net additional number succeeded and updated from the first advantageous period exceeds, for example, “2090”, The case where the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less is shown. When the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less, the corresponding ending telop is displayed as shown by SB12 to SB13 in FIG. When the ending telop is displayed according to the value of the advantageous period counter, the update display of the net additional number is continued. The ending telop is displayed until the number of games in the second advantageous period reaches the upper limit of 1500 and ends.

  When the value of the advantageous period counter reaches 0, the first condition is satisfied and the second advantageous period ends, the game data during the second advantageous period is initialized, while SB45 in FIG. 23. Since the processing of SB46 and SB46 is not performed, the effect data from the first advantageous period is succeeded thereafter. Further, after the second advantageous period ends, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push order bell is won because the normal period is controlled. Therefore, the net additional number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 51, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

  When the net increase in the advantageous period is succeeded in this way, the net increase can be updated and displayed during the next advantageous period. Even in this case, the net increase number reaches, for example, "2370" so that the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to the upper limit value "2400" of the cumulative number as the net increase number is not displayed. At that time, the net additional number may be hidden, or the net additional number may be hidden and a special effect may be executed. Even after the net increase in number reaches "2370", the sub CPU 71 updates the net increase in number as the game progresses. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of a special effect.

  When the net added number reaches "2370", as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the net added number displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 27 is hidden and a special effect "Congratulations!" You may make it display such a message. Further, when the number of net additions reaches “3000”, a message such as “Congratulations!” May be displayed as a special effect as shown in FIG. 52B. Other special effects may include a message such as "Great!" The sub CPU 71 performs a process of separately calculating the net additional number in the controlled AT during the currently controlled advantageous period, and when the special additional number is executed with the net additional number being hidden, the sub CPU 71 is currently controlled. It is also possible to display only the net increase in the number of ATs during the advantageous period.

-Example of reflecting to the production other than the display of the net additional number In Fig. 51, the example of taking over the net additional number from the previous advantageous period and reflecting it to the net additional number in the next advantageous period has been explained. Not limited to this, for example, an effect corresponding to the succeeded net additional number (hereinafter, also referred to as a net additional number corresponding effect) may be executed during the next advantageous period. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect corresponding to the net additional number.

  FIG. 53 shows an example of a display screen during AT controlled in the next advantageous period in a state where “250” is taken over as the net additional number in the previous advantageous period. As the effect corresponding to the net increase in number, for example, the image of the ⊚ mark is used, and the ∘ mark is displayed for the number of quotients obtained by dividing the succeeded net increase in number by 100. In FIG. 53, since the quotient is 2 (= 250/100), two ⊚ marks are displayed. That is, 100 sheets are displayed as one mark. As a result, it is possible to grasp the rough estimate of the net number of sheets increased in the previous advantageous period. Note that, similarly to FIG. 51, the net additional number that has been inherited from the previous advantageous period is continuously updated during the normal period and the like, and in the AT during the next advantageous period, according to the continuously increased net additional number, You may make it display a mark. In either case, the net number of ATs to be increased during the current advantageous period may be displayed separately from the ⊚ mark, as indicated by "TOTAL: 15" in FIG. Further, the display itself of the net additional number may be performed by using such a mark instead of a specific number.

-Example of reflecting on the end screen of the advantageous period, etc. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (h), FIG. 29 (d), etc., as the end screen when the AT ends and the advantageous period ends, This time, an example of displaying the game history information including the number of AT games and the number of net additions during the advantageous period has been described. However, the game history information displayed on the end screen is not limited to the game history during the current advantageous period. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the end screen.

  When the controlled AT ends from the end of the previous advantageous period until the game is exhausted 100 times, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game history information during the previous advantageous period as << previous result >> May be displayed, and the game history information during the current advantageous period may be displayed as << current result >>.

  Even when the end screen is displayed in this way, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" in accordance with the progress of the game during each advantageous period, the net additional number is hidden as described with reference to FIG. 29 and the like. However, the ending ticker may be displayed, and the net addition number may not be displayed as the game history information on the ending screen after the ending ticker is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent notification of a net increase (TOTAL) that is equal to or more than the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number for one game to "2400", which is the upper limit of the cumulative number.

  As another example of the end screen, when the game history during the current advantageous period or the game history obtained by adding the game history during the previous advantageous period satisfies the specific condition, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to display a special end screen that displays a message such as “Completed Congratulations!” In the background of the rainbow mode without notifying detailed history information. The specific condition is, for example, the maximum of one game with respect to "2400", which is the upper limit of the cumulative number, in the game history during the current advantageous period or the game history obtained by adding together the game history during the previous advantageous period. It is equal to or more than the sum of payouts, and ending telop during the advantageous period (including both ending telop displayed when the upper limit of the number of games is reached and ending telop displayed when the upper limit of the cumulative number is reached) May be displayed, and the condition that is satisfied by the story being developed to the final story may be included.

-Example of reflecting on game screen during mobile interlocking Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game screen during mobile interlocking. During the interlocking with the mobile phone, an effect may be executed according to the net number of prints increased during the advantageous period. FIG. 55 (a) shows an example of the screen after the net addition number reaches "1000" and the OVER display is performed during the mobile interlocking. After the OVER display is performed, a message such as “acquire!” May be displayed as a pop-up below the net increase display on the liquid crystal display 27.

  Further, during the mobile interlocking, the effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the previous advantageous period may be succeeded to and reflected on the game screen. FIG. 55 (b) shows an example of a screen when the total net increase in number succeeded and updated from the previous advantageous period reaches "2000" during the AT in the next advantageous period. Even if the net increase in the number of ATs during the current advantageous period is relatively small at "120", when the total net increase in the numbers updated after the previous advantageous period reaches "2000", the liquid crystal display 27 A message such as “acquire!” May be displayed in a pop-up below the net increase in number display.

(B) Modified Example Regarding Over Display (a) Net Increase Number Non-Display Period in Net Increase Number Calculation Period In the above embodiment, the confirmation screen is illustrated as a net increase number non-display period in which the net increase number is not displayed but the net increase number is not displayed. However, when the net addition number reaches “2000” in the confirmation screen and the bonus is started by winning the winning RBB, as shown in FIG. 28, the net addition number and the OVER display are shown. An example in which the net increase in number and the OVER display are displayed in the rainbow mode when the net increase in number has reached “2000” at the time of the first medal payout after once is displayed in the normal mode has been described. Similarly, when the number of net additions reaches “2000” in the period of non-display of additional number of nets different from that during the confirmation screen is displayed, and when the period of displaying the number of net additions is controlled, the number of net additions is increased in the normal mode. After the display, the net additional number may be displayed in a rainbow mode when the net additional number has reached “2000” even when the first medal is paid out. For example, in the CZ that does not display the net extra number, if the net extra number reaches "2000" and the AT is again won and controlled by the AT, the net extra number is temporarily displayed. After that, if the net additional number has reached “2000” even when the first medal is paid out, the net additional number and the OVER display may be displayed in a rainbow mode. As a result, the net increase in number is not suddenly displayed in the rainbow mode at the moment the display of the net increase is resumed, so that it is possible to prevent an inconvenience such as misunderstanding or confusing the player. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example has been described in which, once the rainbow flag is set in the SB 20, the net additional number and the OVER display are displayed in the rainbow mode until the advantageous period ends, regardless of the subsequent net additional number. However, in a gaming machine designed so that a game is played for a relatively long time in the net additional number non-display period, after the net additional number display or the like is once displayed in a rainbow mode, for example, a net additional number non-display period such as CZ. , It is expected that the net increase in number will greatly decrease during the net increase in non-display period, and in this case, when the net increase display is restarted, the value does not reach "2000" (eg 1900). It is possible that Even in such a case, if the net additional number is displayed in the rainbow mode as shown in the above embodiment, only the net additional number is displayed in the rainbow mode even though the net additional number does not reach "2000". It is possible that the player is in a bad mood by being displayed. In order to solve such a problem, for example, even when the net additional number once reaches "2000", the net additional number is a predetermined value within a predetermined range with respect to "2000" in the subsequent game ( For example, when it becomes less than "1950"), the rainbow flag may be reset so that the net increase in number is not displayed in the rainbow mode until "2000" is reached again. As a result, for example, even after the net additional number reaches "2000" and is displayed in the rainbow mode, the net additional number decreases as the game progresses, and the net additional number is less than the predetermined value ("1950"). When this happens, the net increase in number is displayed in a normal manner, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as a player's discomfort. Even when the rainbow flag is reset, the OVER display number may be maintained as it is without being reset, or the OVER display number of "2000" may be reset. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the net increase number calculation period, the predetermined end condition is satisfied by ending the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) after the AT is controlled and the advantageous RT is controlled to start ART. The period until establishment is illustrated. However, the net increase amount calculation period is not limited to this as long as it includes a state in which the payout rate is greater than 1. It may be a period until the ending condition of is satisfied. Further, even if the payout rate is not more than 1, it may be a period from the announcement of the AT winning to the end of the advantageous period until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and the advantage from the announcement of the AT start It may be a period until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied by the termination of the period.

(B) Advantageous State and Special State In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the AT is illustrated as the advantageous state and the bonus is illustrated as the special state. However, the advantageous state and the special state are not limited to these, respectively. For example, it may be an advantageous state for the player, such as RT in which the winning probability of the re-play combination is improved.

(C) Regarding the net increase number calculation period In the above embodiment, the trigger for starting the net increase number calculation period is shown to be established by being controlled by ART. However, the trigger for starting the net increase number calculation period is not limited to this, and may be established by being controlled by a bonus, or by being controlled by either ART or bonus. It may be one. Further, although the trigger for ending the net increase number calculation period is shown as an example that is established when the advantageous period ends, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be established when the AT is not controlled after the bonus ends. , AT may end (the number of AT games becomes 0), or the game may be established a predetermined number of times (for example, 30) after the advantageous period ends, or the like.

(D) Predetermined Display Mode and Special Display Mode In the above-described embodiment, the normal display mode in which the red character and the like which are common to each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen are mainly used has been illustrated as the predetermined display mode. However, if the predetermined display mode is a normal display mode, it does not need to be a mode common to each of the net additional number display, the OVER display, and the end screen, and a different mode (for example, the net additional number display is a red character, OVER). The display may have pink characters and the end screen may have silver characters). Further, as the special display mode, the rainbow mode mainly including the characters of the rainbow pattern common to each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen has been illustrated. However, the special display mode only needs to be a mode different from the predetermined display mode, and does not have to be the common mode for each of the net additional number display, the OVER display, and the end screen, and a different mode (for example, the net additional number display is a rainbow pattern. , The OVER display is a floral character, and the end screen is a gold character). As a result, it is possible to abundant variations of the display modes of the net additional number display, the OVER display, and the end screen.

  The special display mode is also a mode used in other game effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game, and is more advantageous to the player than when the game effect is executed in another mode. It may be a mode in which is set to be high. Here, as the game effect, an example of a possibility notification effect that is an effect for notifying the possibility of AT win or bonus win and that can be executed by any of a plurality of types including a rainbow mode. When the possibility notification effect is executed in the rainbow mode, the possibility that the AT win or the bonus win is higher than that in the other mode may be set. As a result, regardless of the type of effect, it is possible to consistently give the player a sense of expectation and superiority when executed in the special display mode.

  Further, as the special display mode, one mode of the rainbow mode is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be defined (for example, rainbow mode, floral pattern mode, animal pattern mode, etc.). Further, the degree of advantage for the player may be set to be different depending on which of the plurality of types of special display modes the net additional number display is performed. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the level of the set value that has been set, the number of AT games that have not been notified, and the like. For example, when the rainbow display is displayed as the special display mode when the net number of prints reaches “2000”, a higher set value may be set than when the special display mode is displayed in the floral pattern mode. May be higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to which special display mode the net additional display is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(E) End screen In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (e) and the like, in the end screen in the special display mode, not only the net additional number but also other game results such as the number of AT games are displayed in the rainbow mode. The example of displaying with is explained. However, on the end screen in the special display mode, only the net additional number may be displayed in the rainbow mode, and the other game results may be displayed in the normal mode. Further, the end screen may be displayed in the normal mode (see FIG. 25 (h)) regardless of whether or not the rainbow flag is set.

(F) About Specific Number as Special Display Mode In the above embodiment, an example in which the net increase number “2000” is set as the specific number has been described, but not limited to this, “1500”, “2200”, etc. It may be defined. Also, an example in which one value is set as the specific number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of values (1500, 2000, 2200) are set, and the net increase display reaches any of the net increase numbers. It may be determined that the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on whether or not the special display mode is set. For example, when the special display mode is displayed when the net additional number reaches "2200", a higher setting value may be set than when the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode when reaching "2000". You may make it high. As a result, the player can be focused on the timing at which the net additional number is displayed in the special display mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(C) Modified Example Regarding Caution Display In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the ending effect is performed from the start of the last game in the advantageous state to the start of the next game, and the ending effect is predetermined. The example in which the caution is displayed until a predetermined time has passed from the timing has been described. Also, if the operation to start the next game is performed early, the ending effect will be terminated at that time, but since the caution display will continue, the caution display will be displayed across the next game. Can be done. However, the ending effect may be performed during the wait period (hereinafter also referred to as the ending wait period) by generating a wait for stopping the progress of the game. That is, during the ending effect, even if an operation for advancing the game is performed, the ending effect may be continued without being effectively accepted. The ending wait period (5 seconds) is set longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds) for displaying the caution. As a result, the warning display may be completed during the ending wait period. Further, the suggestion display may be performed before or after the caution display as long as it is performed during the period other than the period during which the caution display is performed during the ending effect.

  In the above-described embodiments and modified examples, an example in which one type is determined as the background image according to the game state or the like has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be determined. . For example, as an ending background for AT end that performs a caution display, a background image in which the shutter of the camera is closed and a background image in which treasure overflows from the treasure box are provided, and either of these ends in AT. It may be displayed as an ending background for the game. For example, the sub CPU 71 may determine which ending background is to be displayed by random number lottery according to the number of net additions in AT. Even when a plurality of types of backgrounds are defined, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), regardless of which background is displayed, a layer having a higher priority than the layer on which the background is displayed. It suffices as long as the warning is displayed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background from being obstructed by the background regardless of which background is displayed.

  The gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification may further include the following configuration. The gaming machine executes a movable member effect in which the movable member is changeable between a position overlapping the display area and a position not overlapping the display area, and the movable member is changed over a plurality of stages so that the area overlapping the display area is increased. A movable member effect control means for controlling the movable member effect control means, the area of the movable member effect changeable by a predetermined stage does not overlap with the area in which the caution image is displayed, An area where the movable member changes after the predetermined step overlaps with an area where the caution image can be displayed. According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, the player can visually recognize the change of the movable member up to a predetermined stage in the movable member effect, so that the caution image is displayed without impairing the playability. be able to. The details will be described below. For example, a movable member that is changeable between a position overlapping with the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 and a position not overlapping at all is provided. You may make it perform a movable member effect | action by drive-controlling a movable member so that the area | region which overlaps with a display area may increase in multiple steps (3 steps). The predetermined effect condition is satisfied, for example, when the "CH" combination is won in the first game after the advantageous state ends.

  Further, in the first stage of the movable member effect, similar to the dialogue display, for example, the position is changed to a position overlapping only the region 1 shown in FIG. 32 (a), and after the second stage, as shown in FIG. 32 (a). The area 2 may be changed to a position overlapping the area where the caution display is performed. Even in this case, the movable member effects in the second and subsequent stages are performed when the next game is started after the game in which the drive control in the first stage is performed is finished, as in the case of the dialogue display. . As a result, even when the caution display is displayed in the area 2 when starting the movable member effect, it is possible to execute the first-stage effect of the movable member effect, which impairs the playability. It is possible to display the warning without. Further, even if the first stage effect of the movable member effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being disturbed. The movable member may be, for example, a shutter member that is provided so as to surround four sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27, and can be covered from each of the four sides. It may be a accessory member that is provided in the liquid crystal display device 27 and drops the member in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification, the display or operation in the second stage or later of the dialogue display or the movable member effect is displayed after the game in which the display or the operation in the first stage is performed, and then the next game is performed. The example in which the caution display does not overlap the serif display and the movable member by being executed at the start has been described. However, the method of not overlapping the serif display or the movable member in the area for displaying the caution display is not limited to this, and for example, whether or not the sub CPU 71 is performing the caution display (the predetermined time has not elapsed. Or not), and when it is determined that the caution display is being performed, it is determined that the caution display is not performed by restricting / prohibiting the display or operation of the dialogue display and the second stage or later of the moving member performance. It is also possible to allow the display or the operation of the second stage and thereafter of the dialogue display and the movable member effect. Further, the execution time of the effect may be set in advance, and in this case, the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages may be set to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display or operation in the first step can be executed until a predetermined time has elapsed after the caution display is performed, and the display or operation in the second and subsequent steps is the warning display. It may be executed after a predetermined time has passed after the execution. Further, the example in which the dialogue display and the movable member effect are executed over a plurality of games has been described, but the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages may be performed after a lapse of a predetermined time after the caution display. For example, it may be executed and ended within one game.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, as an example of the display mode of the caution display, the display mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame is illustrated as shown in FIG. 35 and the like. However, the display mode of the caution display is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the caution display may be a mode in which a message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame and the frame is displayed in a blinking manner, and a noticeable mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a jagged frame Alternatively, the message image of the caution display may be displayed in the area 2, and a jagged large frame including the message image may be displayed in the entire display area. In this case, the large jagged frame and the message image of the caution display are continuous, and even if the display mode such as the color and shape of the continuous large jagged frame changes according to the degree of advantage. Good. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of advantage while paying attention to the caution display. Further, from the viewpoint of ensuring visibility, it is preferable that the color of the caution display is not similar to the color of the background image.

  Further, the example of displaying the caution display layer in the layer having the highest priority among the plurality of layers has been described. However, the caution display may be displayed in a layer having a lower priority than the layer such as the navigation effect as the specific display or the history display, as long as it has a higher priority than the background image layer. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the warning display from being obstructed by the background. Further, in the relationship between the caution display and the specific display, as shown in FIG. 32B, since the areas used for the display do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the special display from obstructing the caution display.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, the example in which the background image is an image including only the image corresponding to the gaming state has been described. However, the background image may include a caution image. Further, an example has been described in which the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed using different areas as shown in FIG. However, the caution display and the suggestion display are not simultaneously performed as shown in FIG. 33 and the like. Therefore, the area used for the caution display may be used for the suggestion display. For example, the caution display may be displayed using the area 2 and the suggestion display may be displayed using the area 2. Even in this case, since the caution display and the suggestion display are not performed at the same time, the caution display is not obstructed by the suggestion display, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, as for the suggestion display, if the suggestion display is not newly started or the display mode of the suggestion display is not changed while the caution display is being performed, the suggestion display is continuously performed and the caution display is concurrently performed. It may be one.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification, an example has been described in which the suggestion display is not performed or updated during the caution display by adjusting the execution timing and the layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the caution display is being performed. When the caution display is not being performed, the suggestion display is permitted or updated, and when the caution display is being performed, the suggestion display is allowed. May be restricted or prohibited from being newly performed or updated.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the caution display is displayed in the predetermined area 2 has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as the display position and the display mode are maintained from the display start time to the display end time. For example, depending on whether it is the bonus end time or the AT end time, The display mode of the caution display may be different.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification, an example of terminating the caution display after performing the caution display until a predetermined time has passed has been described. However, the warning display may be continued until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied even after a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined notification end condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting an operation for starting the next game (detection of insertion of a medal, operation of a bet switch, operation of a start switch, etc.). May be. As a result, the warning display can be continued even after the warning display has been performed for a predetermined time, so that the effect of calling attention can be increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the display mode of the caution display does not change from the display start to the display end has been described. However, the display mode of the caution display may be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied. The predetermined change condition may be satisfied by, for example, a suggestion display.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the caution display is displayed using the layer having the highest priority has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as it is displayed using at least a layer having a higher priority than the background. For example, since the error notification is performed during an error in which the game cannot be advanced, the error notification may be displayed using a layer having a higher priority than the caution display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being displayed even in a state where the game cannot be advanced. When an error notification is given during the warning display, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 34D, the warning display is temporarily stopped during the error notification (timing 8 ′ to 10 ′). The warning display may be restarted after the error notification is completed. Further, the warning display to be restarted may be displayed with the remaining time up to the predetermined time when it is once stopped, or may be displayed until the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the restart time. Good. Further, when the error notification is made, the caution display may be ended and the caution display may not be made even after the error notification is finished.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the caution display is performed at the end of the advantageous state has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this, and may be performed by not being controlled in an advantageous state for a predetermined period. Specifically, the warning may be displayed until a predetermined time elapses because the bonus or AT is not controlled even once during the insertion of 500 sheets. Further, the caution display may be performed when displaying a demo screen (also referred to as a customer waiting screen) that is executed when the game is not played for a certain period of time.

  The gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification has been described with respect to an example of displaying the net additional number in an advantageous state as a history display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of AT games, the number of games added to AT, and the like may be displayed. It may be displayed. Also, an example has been described in which the set value is suggested as the suggestion display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game mode may be suggested.

(D) Modified Example Regarding Add-On In the above embodiment, an example in which the add-on effect is restricted when YES is determined in SB55 of FIG. 36 has been described. However, even when it is determined as YES in SB55 of FIG. 36, when the remaining AT game number becomes equal to or more than the remaining upper limit game number due to the current addition, the remaining upper limit game number of the current additional game number is reached. You may make it perform the additional production which notifies the number of games until it plays. As a result, the number of AT games can be notified to the player within the upper limit number of times of the advantageous period.

  Further, the example in which the additional effect in the above embodiment is an effect of notifying the additional game number specified from the additional game number command has been described. However, the additional effect is not limited to this, and may be a notification of the number of games less than or equal to the additional game number specified by the additional game number command. For example, when the number of additional games specified from the additional game number command is “100”, the sub CPU 71 does not execute additional production, “10 game GET!”, “20 game GET!”, “50 game GET”. ! ”Or“ 100 games GET! ”, And the addition effect may be controlled based on the determination result. As a result, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the number of games actually added may exceed the number of games notified by the addition effect.

  In the case of such a configuration, the sub CPU 71, for example, even if the number of remaining AT games is equal to or more than the upper limit number of remaining games, the sub CPU 71 has already notified the player of the addition effect and the like. When the number of remaining AT games is not equal to or more than the remaining upper limit number of games, the additional effect may be executable.

  The slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment uses the remaining upper limit game number command that can specify the upper limit remaining game number up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods and the remaining AT game number that can specify the remaining AT game number as the upper limit arrival specifying information. The example in which the command and the sub CPU 71 are output from the main CPU 61 has been described. However, the upper limit attainment specifying information is not limited to the one configured by a plurality of commands, and may be, for example, one command that configures the remaining upper limit game number and the remaining AT game number.

  In the above embodiment, the AT is illustrated as the advantageous state, and the advantageous period is illustrated as the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled. However, the advantageous state and the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled are not limited to this. For example, the advantageous state is an RT (a state in which the degree of advantage is similar to the advantageous RT in the above-described embodiment) in which the probability of winning the re-game combination is higher than that in the normal state, and the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled is the RT. The period in which a winning combination (for example, a role such as promotion replay) that is the opportunity to control is controlled to a state that is subject to internal lottery (for example, a state like a normal RT that allows you to win promotion promotion is controllable Period).

  Also, the advantageous state control period in which the advantageous state is controlled is the period in which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the additional lottery is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. It may be a period until the net addition number obtained by subtracting the medals used for the bet number setting from the paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number, for a player such as AT game. It may be a period until an advantageous game is played a predetermined number of times. Also, the upper limit of the advantageous state controllable period has been described as an example of the number of games (1500 times) and the total number (2400 coins), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of paid-out medals (3000 coins) can be used. The number of games (1000 games), which is advantageous to the player such as AT games, may be used.

  An example has been described in which the main CPU 61 in the above embodiment executes the additional lottery processing regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit game count is reached before the remaining AT game count is consumed. However, in the addition lottery process, the main CPU 61 has a normal mode in which the addition is won with a predetermined probability and a high probability mode in which the addition is won with a probability higher than the predetermined probability (a state in which the additional lottery is executed in a more advantageous mode than the normal mode) It is possible to control in any of them, and when performing the additional lottery according to the controlled mode, regardless of whether or not the situation is such that the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed, In addition to the control, the additional lottery may be performed according to the controlled mode. Specifically, regarding the process of controlling the mode and the process of performing additional lottery according to the mode, when the remaining upper limit game number is not reached even after the remaining AT game number is consumed, and the remaining AT game number It may be executed in the same manner as in the situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the consumption of. As a result, since there is no processing step for determining whether or not the situation is such that the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side are increased. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by the mode control without doing so.

  On the other hand, in the case of displaying the background image according to the controlled mode (for example, the background image of the day is displayed in the normal mode, the background image of the evening is displayed in the high probability mode), the following control is performed. You may do it. For example, when the remaining upper limit game number is not reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, the background image is switched according to the controlled mode, while the remaining AT game number is consumed. If the number of remaining games reaches the upper limit, the background image may not be changed depending on the mode change (for example, the special background may be maintained).

  Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining AT number of games is consumed, at least between the time when the bonus is won during AT and the time when the bonus is won. Regardless, the additional lottery process may not be executed. As a result, the player can be paid attention to the winning of the winning bonus without increasing the processing load on the main CPU 61 side.

  Further, the main CPU 61 wins a bonus (“RBB” or the like in the above embodiment) in which the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to the same probability (no setting difference) regardless of the set value, and is controlled by the bonus. In this case, the additional lottery process may be executed during the bonus regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 consumes the number of remaining AT games when the bonus determined in the probability that the winning probability in the internal lottery depends on the set value (there is a setting difference) is won and the bonus is controlled by the bonus. The additional lottery process may not be executed during the bonus regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the sub CPU 71 in the above-described embodiment executes the additional effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. An example of controlling whether to execute a special background has been described. However, the sub CPU 71 only needs to control a predetermined effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed, and the remaining number of AT games is set. The execution ratio of a predetermined effect (including an additional effect) may be changed depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before consumption. For example, in the gaming machine capable of executing the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value to the player, the sub CPU 71 does not reach the upper limit number of games until the remaining AT game number is consumed. The set value suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate in a situation where the upper limit number of remaining games is reached by the time the remaining AT game number is consumed, rather than when. As a result, the set value suggestion effect is easily executed when the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed, so that the internally added number of additional games is deleted. It is possible to supplement the loss. Further, in the case where the ending telop display is displayed and AT is ended, or in the case of a special ending screen as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the AT is ended without displaying the ending telop display, or in FIG. As shown in (h), the set value suggestion effect is more easily executed than in the case of the normal end screen, or the more advantageous set value suggestion effect (the suggestion effect of the set value 5 or 6 is confirmed is the set value of 2 or more is confirmed). (Which can be said to be more advantageous than the suggestive effect) may be easily executed. Further, the sub CPU 71 may control a predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game ends is described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to this as long as they are output at a predetermined timing in one game. It may be output at the timing when the rotation is started.

(Other)
In the above-described embodiment, the determination switch 81a, the left selection switch 81b, the right selection switch 81c, the upper selection switch 81d, and the lower selection switch 81e are provided as the operation means that receives operations in the administrator menu state and the player menu state. The provided operation unit 81 is illustrated. However, the operation means for accepting an operation in the administrator menu state and the player menu state is not limited to this, and may be composed of two switches (a switch for determination and a switch for selection). Further, the operation means (for example, the start switch 19, the stop switches 21L to 21R, etc.) used in the progress of the game may also be used.

  Further, on the administrator menu screen or the player menu screen, a guide display may be displayed to guide the administrator or the player which switch (operating means) should be operated. FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which guidance display is performed in the lower left part of the administrator menu screen. FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which guidance display is performed in the lower left part of the player menu screen. As the guidance display, as shown in each of FIGS. 56A and 56B, it is preferable to display an image simulating the effect operation unit 81 (hereinafter, referred to as an operation unit simulated image). Moreover, you may make it guide which switch of the production | operation operation part 81 becomes a determination operation, and which switch becomes a selection operation, or it may be highlighted and highlighted. By doing so, it is possible to inform the manager or the player which switch should be operated, and it is possible to prevent an unnecessary switch from being operated. Further, the operation unit simulated image may be a common image or a similar image on both the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen. By using a common or similar image in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the amount of data, and to prevent the player and the administrator from misunderstanding that there may be different effect operation units. it can.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination processing on the sub CPU 71 side, an error notification is issued regardless of whether the administrator menu screen or the player menu screen is displayed. The priority example has been described. However, in the inspection mode for verifying the operation check of the rendering device that is driven and controlled by the sub CPU 71, the error notification is performed even when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination processing on the side of the sub CPU 71. Instead, the display during the inspection mode may be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection from being disturbed by the error notification.

  In the above embodiment, "Navivoice", "Costume", "Wallpaper", etc. have been illustrated as game items. However, the game items are not limited to these, and instead of or in addition to these, for example, "volume adjustment" for adjusting the volume, "BGM selection" for selecting the BGM, winning history or winning history of the RBB or the small role. “Game history” for displaying “” may be defined, and any item that can be confirmed or set by the player may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “effect customization” of the game items has been described as an example in which various settings can be made via the player menu screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific item among the customizable items is a game. It may be possible to change the settings without going through the administrator menu screen. For example, among the customizable items, the “wallpaper” item and the like can be operated without operating the player menu screen by operating the left selection switch 81b and the right selection switch 81c in the game standby mode, or the upper selection switch 81d and the lower selection switch 81c. The switch 81e may be operated to change the setting. FIG. 56 (c) is a diagram showing a display state of the liquid crystal display 27 during the game standby, and FIG. 56 (d) is a display state of the liquid crystal display 27 when the wallpaper is changed and set during the game standby. FIG. When the game is on standby (when a predetermined time has elapsed after the game is on standby), as shown in FIG. 56 (c), as described with reference to FIG. Along with the image being displayed, a message such as "Change wallpaper with left and right buttons" is displayed. It is easier for the player to understand that the operation button used for the production customization during the game standby is a switch between one direction such as left and right and another direction paired with the other direction. It should be noted that the up / down buttons are not limited to the left / right buttons. Further, when the guidance display is performed, it is better to output a sound (hereinafter, changeable effect) that can be specified as changeable, such as "You can change the wallpaper" as shown in a balloon in FIG. 56 (c). preferable. This allows the player to be informed that the wallpaper can be changed by operating the left and right buttons.

  When the left and right buttons are operated, the wallpaper image is changed and set as shown in FIG. 56 (d). The shaded area in FIG. 56 (d) indicates that the image is different from the wallpaper in FIG. 56 (c). Also, when the switch is operated to change various wallpapers, a sound that can specify the change such as "wallpaper changed" as shown by a balloon in FIG. ) Is preferably output. This allows the player to recognize that the change operation, which is an operation for changing the wallpaper, has been reflected. Further, the change specific effect may be performed each time the change operation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and within the period from the time when one change operation is performed until a certain time elapses, a further change operation is temporarily performed. Even if it is performed, the change specific effect is not performed, the change specific effect is performed again by the change operation after the elapse of the fixed time, and the change specific effect may not be performed even if the change operation is performed before the elapse of the fixed time. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the annoyance that the change specifying operation is output every time the changing operation is performed. It should be noted that specific items may be customizable by operating a predetermined button such as the left and right buttons even when the guidance display is not being performed while the game is on standby. .

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the period during which the AT can be controlled as an advantageous state is the period in which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the additional lottery is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a period until a predetermined number of medals are paid out, or may be a period until the net additional number obtained by subtracting the medals used for setting the bet number from the paid medals reaches a predetermined number. , It may be a period until a predetermined number of games, such as AT games, that are advantageous to the player are played.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game ends is described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to this as long as they are output at a predetermined timing in one game. It may be output at the timing when the rotation is started.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on when the AT winning notification is performed has been described. However, the start of lighting of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not limited to this as long as it is a predetermined timing during the advantageous period. For example, when the CZ is started, or the so-called ball output rate is controlled to a section of 1 or more. Timing, the AT during the advantageous period, the timing at which the so-called payout rate is controlled to a section of 1 or more and the first navigation effect is executed, the AT during the advantageous period, or the so-called payout rate is 1 or more. The timing may be such that the first navigation effect is executed under the control of the section and more medals than the bet number is awarded.

  In the above embodiment, as the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, for example, the condition established by the “single hand” win or the “bonus 1” or “bonus 2” win However, for example, as the condition for shifting to the advantageous period, there is a condition to be satisfied by winning a "single hand" and a condition to be satisfied by winning a "bonus 1" or "bonus 2", which is a CZ transition lottery. In addition to these, the conditions and the AT transition lottery conditions are those that are satisfied by the "ordinary rep" winning and the conditions that are satisfied by winning any of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4". Good. In this case, under the conditions that are satisfied by the "ordinary rep" winning and the conditions that are satisfied by winning any of the "right correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4", the conditions that are satisfied by the "single hand role" winning and " You may decide to control to CZ or AT with a lower probability than the probability to determine to control to CZ or AT by winning "bonus 1" or "bonus 2".

  In the above embodiment, the AT is illustrated as the advantageous state, and the advantageous period is illustrated as the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled. However, the advantageous state and the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled are not limited to this. For example, the advantageous state may be an additional specialization period in which the probability that the number of AT games is increased increases, and a bonus state or RT in which the probability of winning a re-game combination is higher than in the normal state (the above-mentioned implementation In a form in which the degree of advantage is the same as that of the advantageous RT in the form, and during the period in which the advantageous state can be controlled, the winning combination (for example, a role such as promotion replay) that triggers the control of the RT is the target of the internal lottery. It may be a period during which control is possible in such a state (for example, a period during which control is possible in a state such as normal RT in which promotion replay can be won).

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the push-order bell is illustrated as the winning combination group to be notified of the advantageous operation mode notification image (navi effect). However, the target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is not limited to this, for example, a winning combination group including an advantageous re-playing combination that can be controlled to an advantageous RT with a high replay winning probability, and an advantageous re-playing combination is displayed. The target may be a plurality of types of winning combinations (so-called push order replays) having different operation modes (push order) for winning a prize. In addition, the target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is, for example, a winning combination group including a disadvantageous re-playing combination that can be controlled to a disadvantageous RT with a low replay winning probability, and an operation for avoiding winning of a disadvantageous re-playing combination. A plurality of types of winning combination groups (so-called push order replays) having different modes (push order) may be targeted.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display unit 13 includes three left variable display columns 10L to right variable display column 10R will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine including one variable display column may also be used. It may be a gaming machine having four or more variable display rows. Further, although the variable display unit 13 is shown as an example including the reels 11L to 11R, the variable display unit 13 is not limited to this, and may be configured by a display device such as a liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED. Further, although an example in which only one pay line is set for the variable display unit 13 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of pay lines may be set.

  Further, the gaming machine as the slot machine in the above-described embodiment and modification may have the following configuration.

  Preferably, a plurality of types of symbols can be variably displayed by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and in a gaming machine capable of giving a game value according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped, Advantageous state control means for controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a gaming value set as a bet number from the provided gaming value between the advantageous state control and the predetermined end condition being satisfied. A net increase calculation means for calculating a net increase calculated by subtracting, and a net increase display means for displaying the net increase calculated by the net increase calculation means in the advantageous state, wherein the net increase display means is the net increase Until the number reaches a specific number, the net increase is displayed in a predetermined display mode, and when the net increase reaches the specific number, the net increase is different from the predetermined display mode. Displayed in a display mode, the net increase to maintain the display in the special display mode even when it becomes less than the specific number in later.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is displayed in the predetermined display mode until the calculated net increase reaches a specific number during the period from the control of the advantageous state to the satisfaction of the predetermined ending condition. , When the net increase reaches a specific number, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and thereafter, the display in the special display mode is maintained even when the net increase is less than the specific number. To be done. Thus, after the net increase reaches the specific number, the special increase is displayed regardless of whether the net increase is less than the specific number. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific number has been reached by whether or not the net additional number is displayed in the special display mode, and if the player temporarily misses the notification that the net additional number has reached the specific number. Also, since the net increase is displayed in the special display mode, it can be understood that the gaming machine is operating normally, and it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from feeling distrustful.

  Preferably, a special state control means for controlling to a special state which is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player is provided, and the net increase calculation means is controlled until the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. The net increase is continuously calculated even during the special state, the net increase display means displays the net increase even during the special state, and the net increase reaches the specific number during the special state. Even when the net increase is displayed in the special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, the display in the special display mode is maintained even after the net increase is less than the specific number. To do.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special state, and even when the net increase reaches the specific number, the net increase is displayed in the special display mode, and after that, the net increase is Even when the number is less than the specific number, the display in the special display mode is maintained. As a result, the advantageous state and the special state can be associated with each other in the point of calculating and displaying the net increase, and the interest of the game can be improved, and when the special state different from the advantageous state is controlled. Also, it is possible to know whether or not a specific number has been reached depending on whether or not the net increase is displayed in the special display mode, and the gaming machine is operating normally because the net increase is displayed in the special display mode. It is also possible to understand the facts and prevent the player from distrusting the gaming machine.

  Preferably, the special state control means is capable of controlling the special state during a special permissible period during which control to the special state is permitted, and the gaming machine is subject to the special permissible period during the special permissible period. The special increase effect executing means for executing a special increase effect indicating that the special increase time is in effect is provided, and the net increase number calculating means includes the net increase number even during the special increase period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Continuously calculated, the net increase display means suspends the display of the net increase until the special state is controlled after executing the special permissive effect, and when the special state is controlled. When the net increase reaches the specific number from the time when the display of the net increase is restarted to the time when the special permissive effect is performed until the special state is controlled, the special state is controlled. Is the number of the net increase displayed at the predetermined display mode from, the game value in subsequent displays in the special display mode the number net increase when it is granted.

  According to this configuration, while the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special allowance period, the display of the net increase is suspended from the execution of the special allowance production to the control of the special state. This allows the player to concentrate on being controlled to a special state when the special permissive effect is being executed. Further, when the net increase reaches a specific number from the time when the special allowance effect is executed to the time when it is controlled to the special state, after displaying the net increase in a predetermined display mode after being controlled to the special state, the game is played. When the value is given, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode. This prevents the net increase from being suddenly displayed in the special display mode at the moment when the special state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from having a feeling that a special effect has been performed, and to prevent an inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Preferably, the special state control means is capable of controlling the special state during a special permissible period during which control to the special state is permitted, and the gaming machine is subject to the special permissible period during the special permissible period. Special permissive effect execution means for executing a special permissible effect indicating that the special permissible period is in progress, and when the net increase reaches any one of a plurality of predetermined levels, A reaching effect display means for displaying reaching effects, and the net increase calculating means continuously calculates the net increase even during the special allowance period until the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, and the reaching The effect display means, even when the net increase reaches any of the number of stages determined by the plurality of types, during the period from the execution of the special permission effect to the control of the special state. There are not displaying the arrival presentation, the game value in the after after being controlled to the special state to display the reaching effect when it is granted.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special allowance period, but even when the net increase reaches any of a plurality of types, the special allowance effect is executed. The reaching effect is not displayed during the period from when the game value is controlled to the special state, and the reaching effect is displayed when the game value is added after the control to the special state. As a result, the player can concentrate on being controlled to the special state when the special permissive effect is being executed, and the reaching effect is not displayed suddenly at the moment when the special state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from having a feeling that a special effect has been performed, and to prevent an inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Preferably, in a gaming machine that includes a display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of symbols, and in which the privilege can be given according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped, a plurality of layers capable of displaying images are overlapped and displayed. Image display means capable of displaying the predetermined image, the image display means displays a predetermined image in a predetermined layer of the plurality of layers upon completion of an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the predetermined layer displays the predetermined image. When an image is displayed, a caution image prompting the player to pay attention to the game in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer is displayed until at least a predetermined time elapses, and a specific condition regarding the game is satisfied. To display a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in the display area until the predetermined time elapses when the specific condition is satisfied. Wherein an image note image is displayed in a region which does not overlap with the area to be displayed.

  With this configuration, the attention image is displayed in the layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer in which the predetermined image is displayed, at least until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the predetermined image. Further, while the specific image is displayed until the predetermined time during which the caution image is displayed elapses, the specific image is displayed in an area that does not overlap the area in which the caution image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific image while preventing the caution image from being obstructed by the specific image. As a result, while the caution image is being displayed, the player can fully exercise the function of calling attention by visually recognizing the caution image, and at least information concerning that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific image is played. It is possible to surely notify the person or a clerk of the game hall.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes an advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state, the specific condition includes a condition that is satisfied when the advantageous state ends, and the specific image is a game in the advantageous state. A history notification image for notifying information about history is included.

  According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the history notification image even when the caution image is displayed, it is possible to reliably notify the player of information regarding the game history.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and the specific condition is satisfied when the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred. The specific image includes an abnormality notification image for notifying that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to this configuration, the player can visually recognize the abnormality notification image even when the caution image is displayed, and thus it is possible to reliably notify that the abnormality has occurred.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes a stop operation means for stopping the variable display, and a role lottery means for performing a role lottery to determine which of a plurality of roles has been won, and the specific condition is The specific image is highly advantageous to the player, including the condition that the lottery result of the combination lottery is a specific lottery result having a different advantage to the player depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means. The image includes an advantageous operation mode notification image that notifies the advantageous operation mode in a manner that allows specification.

  According to this configuration, the advantageous operation mode notification image can be visually recognized by the player even when the caution image is being displayed, and thus the advantageous operation mode can be reliably notified to the player.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including update effects for updating effect images over a plurality of stages, and the specific condition is that the update effects are executed. The specific image includes a condition to be satisfied, and among the effect images updated in the update effect, the specific image includes an effect image that is updated up to a predetermined stage, and the effect image that is updated in the update effect is after the predetermined step. The effect image updated to is an image displayed in an area overlapping the area in which the caution image can be displayed.

  According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, the player can visually confirm the effect image that is updated up to a predetermined stage in the update effect, so that the caution image is displayed without impairing the playability. be able to.

  Preferably, the image display means displays the display mode of the caution image until at least the predetermined time elapses after displaying the image of the predetermined mode as the caution image, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. It is maintained as it is.

  With this configuration, the display mode of the caution image can be maintained in the predetermined mode from the start of the display of the caution image to the end thereof. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being overlooked, as compared with a case where the display mode changes (movement of the display position, etc.) in the middle.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes game operation receiving means for receiving a game operation for advancing the game, and the image display means receives the game operation by the game operation receiving means while displaying the caution image. Even if it does, the display of the caution image is maintained at least until the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to this configuration, even if the game operation is accepted while displaying the caution image, the display of the caution image is maintained at least until a predetermined time has elapsed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution image from being overlooked, as compared with a case where the display of the caution image is changed (movement of the display position, etc.) by accepting the game operation.

  Preferably, the image display means is capable of displaying a special image different from the predetermined image in a predetermined layer of the plurality of layers, and even in the case of displaying the special image, it has a higher priority than the predetermined layer. The attention image is displayed in a layer with a high level until at least the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to this configuration, even if the special image different from the predetermined image is displayed, the caution image is displayed in the layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer until at least the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the special image.

  Preferably, in a gaming machine that is provided with a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and in which a privilege can be given according to the display result when the variable display is stopped, the progress of the game is controlled and the progress of the game is controlled. A game control means for outputting information according to the above information, and a production control means for controlling the production based on the information, and the game control means determines an advantageous state control period which is a period during which the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. And an end condition for ending the determined advantageous state control period, or when a special end condition different from the end condition is satisfied before the end condition is satisfied. Advantageous state control means for terminating the advantageous state, wherein the special termination condition is that the advantageous state controllable period, which is a period during which the advantageous state can be controlled, reaches an upper limit value. The advantageous state control period determination means is capable of executing additional control for adding the advantageous state control period when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, and by the time the advantageous state control period is consumed. Regardless of whether or not the special end condition is satisfied, the additional control is executed when the predetermined addition condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state control means is configured to meet the special end condition and the advantageous state. By terminating, the residual advantageous state control period is initialized regardless of the residual advantageous state control period that has not been consumed.

  According to this configuration, on the game control means side, regardless of whether or not the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, when the predetermined addition condition is satisfied, the addition control is executed. . Further, when the special ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the remaining advantageous state control period is initialized regardless of the remaining advantageous state control period which is not consumed. As a result, it is possible to prevent gambling in the advantageous state from becoming too high without increasing the processing load and storage capacity on the game control means side.

  Preferably, the game control means is information for making it possible to specify whether or not the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, and upper limit arrival specifying information, In the advantageous state, including the specifying information output means for outputting a plurality of types of specifying information including the addition specifying information for making it possible to specify that the addition control has been executed, the production control means, In the advantageous state, including the additional effect control means capable of executing the additional effect to notify that the additional control is executed when receiving the additional specification information, the additional effect control means, the additional effect control means, the advantageous state control period When the special end condition is satisfied before the consumption of When you are there, to regulate the execution of the plus production.

  According to this configuration, the effect control means executes the additional effect when the additional specifying information is received from the game control means side, while the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed. Is specified based on the upper limit reaching specification information, execution of the additional effect is restricted. That is, the additional effect is executed when the period controlled to the advantageous state is actually extended, and the additional effect is regulated when the period controlled to the advantageous state is not actually extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, even though the advantageous state control period notified by the additional effect has not elapsed.

  Preferably, the upper limit reaching identification information is information capable of specifying a remaining upper limit period until the advantageous state controllable period reaches an upper limit value, and a remaining control period until the advantageous state control period is consumed. Yes, the specifying information output means outputs information capable of specifying the remaining upper limit period and the remaining control period in the game for each game as the upper limit reaching specifying information, and the remaining control period is the When the addition control is executed in the game that outputs the upper limit arrival specifying information, the addition period is included.

  According to this configuration, the remaining control period specified from the upper limit arrival specifying information output for each game includes the added period when the addition control is executed in the game. Thereby, the effect control means can determine whether or not the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, including the added period, so that the presence or absence of the added effect is more accurately determined. I can decide.

  Preferably, a special state control means for controlling a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player is provided, and the advantageous state is provided during the special state controlled until the advantageous state ends. The control period is not passed, while the advantageous state controllable period is passed.

  According to this configuration, even if the special state is controlled before the advantageous state ends, the period during which the special state is controlled to the advantageous state is shortened by the special state, which is disadvantageous to the player. However, since the advantageous state controllable period is not substantially extended, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

  Preferably, the game machine is capable of playing a game and can be provided with a privilege in accordance with the result of the game, and a first menu state in which game items for the player can be displayed in the display area, and an administrator Control item for controlling to any of a plurality of types of states including a second menu state that can be displayed in the display area, and at least an effect control means for controlling the display area according to the state, An operating unit that receives an operation in each of the first menu state and the second menu state, wherein the effect control unit is configured to operate when a predetermined time elapses without operating the operating unit in the first menu state. The display in the first menu state is ended, and the specific time shorter than the predetermined time elapses without operating the operation means in the second menu state. It stops displaying in the second menu state when.

  With such a configuration, when the operation means does not receive the operation in the second menu state, the timing of ending the display of the second menu state is when the operation means does not receive the operation in the first menu state. It is earlier than the timing of ending the display of the first menu state. This can reduce the possibility that the player will see the second menu state in which the management items can be displayed, as compared with the first menu state. Conversely, the display in the first menu state can be displayed longer than the display in the second menu state even when the operation means has not accepted the operation. For this reason, it is possible to confirm the game items at the player's pace with a comparatively long margin. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player sees the second menu state in which the management items can be displayed, while providing a gaming machine in which the display in the first menu state can be confirmed with a margin. .

  1 slot machine, 11L, 11M, 11R reel, 14L, 14M, 14R reel motor, 21L, 21M, 21R stop switch, 27 liquid crystal display, 63 main control board, 73 sub control board.

Claims (3)

Having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In the gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line is stopped,
A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means,
Production operation detection means for detecting production operation,
And a production control unit for controlling execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the player to perform production operation to the production operation detection unit,
The plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows and a state in which only one variable display row among the plurality of variable display rows is variably displayed. Including a final stop operation for stopping the variable display in the one variable display row,
The production control means can start the promotion production in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation,
It is possible to continuously execute the promotion effect started in at least one of the first period and the second period until the effect operation is detected even after the end of the period. ,
The effect control means is provided with the privilege and the identifiable effect capable of specifying whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given, by detecting the effect operation along with the promotion effect. Including an operation corresponding effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of kinds of effects including whether or not it is impossible to specify,
The ratio in which the identifiable effect is executed by the operation-corresponding effect execution means is set to be higher in the second period than in the first period,
The rate at which the unspecified production is executed by the operation-corresponding production execution means is set to be higher in the first period than in the second period ,
The effect control means executes the promotion effect in any of a plurality of types of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode,
In the second period, the ratio at which the operation-specific effect execution unit executes the identifiable effect is more in the predetermined mode than when the special effect is executed in the special mode. It is higher when the promotion effect is executed, and when the privilege is granted, it is higher when the promotion effect in the special mode is executed than when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed. A gaming machine that is set to be expensive . Having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In the gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line is stopped,
A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means,
Production operation detection means for detecting production operation,
And a production control unit for controlling execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the player to perform production operation to the production operation detection unit,
The plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows and a state in which only one variable display row among the plurality of variable display rows is variably displayed. Including a final stop operation for stopping the variable display in the one variable display row,
The production control means can start the promotion production in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation,
It is possible to continuously execute the promotion effect started in at least one of the first period and the second period until the effect operation is detected even after the end of the period. ,
The promotion effect includes a first pattern for executing an unidentifiable effect in which it is impossible to specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the detection of the effect for operation, and the effect for operation. A second pattern for executing a identifiable effect capable of specifying whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by being detected,
The gaming machine is defined such that a rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period is higher than a rate at which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period. Having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In the gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line is stopped,
A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means,
Production operation detection means for detecting production operation,
And a production control unit for controlling execution of a plurality of types of productions including a promotion production that prompts the player to perform production operation to the production operation detection unit,
The plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display rows and a state in which only one variable display row among the plurality of variable display rows is variably displayed. Including a final stop operation for stopping the variable display in the one variable display row,
The production control means can start the promotion production in at least one of a first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and a second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation,
It is possible to continuously execute the promotion effect started in at least one of the first period and the second period until the effect operation is detected even after the end of the period. ,
The effect control means executes the promotion effect in any one of a plurality of types of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and the promotion effect in the special mode is the second mode during the second period. It starts at a higher rate than when it is one period, and the promotion effect in the predetermined mode starts at a higher rate when it is the first period than when it is the second period ,
The effect control means is provided with the privilege and the identifiable effect capable of specifying whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given, by detecting the effect operation along with the promotion effect. Including an operation corresponding effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of kinds of effects including whether or not it is impossible to specify,
In the second period, the ratio at which the operation-specific effect execution unit executes the identifiable effect is more in the predetermined mode than when the special effect is executed in the special mode. It is higher when the promotion effect is executed, and when the privilege is granted, it is higher when the promotion effect in the special mode is executed than when the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is executed. A gaming machine that is set to be expensive .